2013_B_Class

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before you first drive off, read this Operator's

Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with

your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer

vehicle life, follow the instructions and

warning notices in this manual. Disregarding

them may lead to damage to the vehicle or

personal injury.

Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard

of the instructions is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The equipment or model designation of your

vehicle may differ according to:

Rmodel

Rorder

Rcountry variant

Ravailability

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:

Rdesign

Requipment

Rtechnical features

Therefore, descriptions may vary from those

of your own vehicle.

The following are integral components of the

vehicle:

ROperator's Manual

RMaintenance Booklet

REquipment-dependent supplements

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,

always pass the documents on to the new

owner.

The technical documentation team at

Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant

motoring.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

A Daimler Company

2465840481 É2465840481mËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 25

Safety ................................................... 35

Opening/closing ................................. 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 95

Climate control ................................. 113

Driving and parking .......................... 125

On-board computer and displays .... 177

Stowage and features ...................... 229

Maintenance and care ...................... 259

Breakdown assistance ..................... 273

Wheels and tires ............................... 291

Technical data ................................... 321

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...

12 V socket

see Sockets

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 194

Function/notes ................................ 59

Important safety notes .................... 59

Warning lamp ................................. 220

Activating/deactivating cooling

with air dehumidification ................. 118

Active Parking Assist

Display message ............................ 211

Function/notes ............................. 165

Important safety notes .................. 164

Active Service System

see ASSYST PLUS

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64

Adaptive Brake Assist

Display message ............................ 201

Function/notes ................................ 61

Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 63

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 206

Function/notes ............................. 100

Switching on/off (on-board

computer) ...................................... 190

Additional speedometer ................... 189

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 327

Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 37

Front air bag (driver, front

passenger) ....................................... 41


Knee bag .......................................... 42

Safety guidelines ............................. 38

Side impact air bag .......................... 42

Window curtain air bag .................... 42

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

Air vents


Rear ............................................... 124

Setting ........................................... 123

Setting the center air vents ........... 123

Setting the side air vents ............... 124

Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-theft system

Interior motion sensor ..................... 66

Ashtray ............................................... 242

Assistance menu (on-board

computer) .......................................... 187

ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 264

Hiding a service message .............. 264

Notes ............................................. 264

Resetting the service interval

display ........................................... 264

Service message ............................ 264

Special service requirements ......... 265

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 65

Function ........................................... 65

Switching off the alarm .................... 65

ATTENTION ASSIST

Activating/deactivating ................. 188

Display message ............................ 209

Function/notes ............................. 171

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 185

Audio system

see separate operating instructions

Authorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center


Authorized workshops


AUTO lights

Display message ............................ 205

see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/

stop function) .................................... 129

Automatic engine switch-off (ECO

start/stop function) .......................... 129

Automatic headlamp mode ................ 97

4 Index

Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 136

Changing gear ............................... 135

DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 133

Display message ............................ 215

Drive program display .................... 133

Driving tips .................................... 135

Emergency running mode .............. 139

Engaging drive position .................. 134

Engaging neutral ............................ 134

Engaging reverse gear ................... 134

Engaging the park position ............ 133

Kickdown ....................................... 135

Manual drive program .................... 136

Overview ........................................ 132

Problem (malfunction) ................... 139

Program selector button ................ 135

Pulling away ................................... 127

Starting the engine ........................ 127

Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 136

Transmission position display ........ 133

Transmission positions .................. 134


emergency mode ............................... 139

B

Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 107

Display message ............................ 205

Bag hook ............................................ 237

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60

Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 70


Replacing ......................................... 70

Battery (vehicle)

Charging ........................................ 281

Display message ............................ 208


Jump starting ................................. 283

Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 37

Blinds

see Roller sunblind

Blind Spot Assist


Notes/function .............................. 173

Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 200

Notes ............................................. 327

Brake lamps

Adaptive ........................................... 63

Changing bulbs .............................. 107

Display message ............................ 203

Brakes

ABS .................................................. 59

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61

BAS .................................................. 60

Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 327

Display message ............................ 194

Driving tips .................................... 146


Maintenance .................................. 147

Parking brake ................................ 142

Warning lamp ................................. 220

Breakdown

see Flat tire

see Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbs

see Changing bulbs

C

Calling up a malfunction

see Display messages

Car

see Vehicle

Care

Carpets .......................................... 271

Car wash ........................................ 265

Display ........................................... 269

Exhaust pipe .................................. 269

Exterior lights ................................ 268

Gear or selector lever .................... 270

Interior ........................................... 269

Matte finish ................................... 267

Notes ............................................. 265

Paint .............................................. 267

Plastic trim .................................... 269

Power washer ................................ 266

Rear view camera .......................... 269

Roof lining ...................................... 271

Seat belt ........................................ 271

Index 5

Seat cover ..................................... 270

Sensors ......................................... 269

Steering wheel ............................... 270

Trim pieces .................................... 270

Washing by hand ........................... 266

Wheels ........................................... 267

Windows ........................................ 268

Wiper blades .................................. 268

Wooden trim .................................. 270

Cargo compartment cover ............... 237

Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 234


Notes on use ................................. 236

Cargo compartment floor

Height adjustment ......................... 240

Opening/closing ............................ 239

Stowage well (under) ..................... 239

Cargo net

Attaching ....................................... 239

Important safety information ......... 238

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 237

Car wash (care) ................................. 265

Center console

Lower section .................................. 31

Upper section .................................. 30

Central locking

Automatic locking (on-board

computer) ...................................... 191

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68

Changing bulbs

Brake lamps ................................... 107

Cornering light function ................. 106

High-beam headlamps ................... 105


License plate lighting ..................... 109

Low-beam headlamps .................... 105

Overview of bulb types .................. 103

Parking lamps ................................ 105

Rear fog lamp ................................ 107

Removing/replacing the cover

(front wheel arch) .......................... 104

Reversing lamps ............................ 107

Standing lamps (front) ................... 105

Tail lamps ...................................... 107

Turn signals (front) ......................... 106

Turn signals (rear) .......................... 107

Child-proof locks


Rear doors ....................................... 58

Children

In the vehicle ................................... 47

Restraint systems ............................ 47

Child seat

Automatic recognition ..................... 50

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ............................................ 51

On the front-passenger seat ............ 49

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 54

Recommendations ........................... 56

Suitable positions ............................ 54

Top Tether ....................................... 52

Cigarette lighter ................................ 243

Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-

zone) .............................................. 117

Controlling automatically ............... 119

Cooling with air dehumidification . . 118

Defrosting the windows ................. 121

Defrosting the windshield .............. 121

Dual-zone automatic climate

control ........................................... 115


Indicator lamp ................................ 119

Notes on using automatic climate

control ................................... 115, 117

Overview of systems ...................... 114

Problems with cooling with air

dehumidification ............................ 119

Problem with the rear window

defroster ........................................ 122

Setting the air distribution ............. 120

Setting the airflow ......................... 120

Setting the air vents ...................... 123

Setting the temperature ................ 119

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ............................................ 122

Switching on/off ........................... 118

Switching residual heat on/off ...... 122

Switching the rear window

defroster on/off ............................ 122

Switching the ZONE function on/

off .................................................. 120

6 Index

Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 26

see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST ....... 60

COMAND


Combination switch ............................ 98

Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 257

Calling up ....................................... 257

Setting ........................................... 257

Consumption statistics (on-board

computer) .......................................... 182

Convenience closing feature .............. 78

Convenience opening feature ............ 78

Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 263

Display message ............................ 206

Filling capacity ............................... 328


Temperature gauge ........................ 179

Warning lamp ................................. 226

Cooling

see Climate control

Cornering light function

Changing bulbs .............................. 106

Display message ............................ 203

Function/notes ................................ 99

Crash-responsive emergency

lighting ............................................... 102

Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 150

Cruise control lever ....................... 150

Deactivating ................................... 151

Display message ............................ 213

Driving system ............................... 150

Function/notes ............................. 150


Setting a speed .............................. 151

Storing and maintaining current

speed ............................................. 151

Cup holder

Center console .............................. 241


Rear compartment ......................... 242

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24

Customer Relations Department ....... 24

D

Dashboard


Dashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting

Data

see Technical data

Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 205

Switching on/off (on-board

computer) ...................................... 190

Switching on/off (switch) ................ 97

Dealerships


Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board

computer) ...................................... 190

Interior lighting .............................. 191

Diagnostics connection ...................... 23

Digital speedometer ......................... 183

DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmission

Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 269

Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 264

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 193

Driving systems ............................. 209

Engine ............................................ 206

General notes ................................ 193

Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 193

Lights ............................................. 202

Safety systems .............................. 194

SmartKey ....................................... 218

Tires ............................................... 214

Vehicle ........................................... 215

Distance display (on-board

computer) .......................................... 187

Distance recorder ............................. 182

see Trip odometer

Distance warning function


Function/notes ................................ 60

Warning lamp ................................. 228

DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions ..................... 154

Cruise control lever ....................... 154

Deactivating ................................... 157

Index 7

Display message ............................ 211

Displays in the multifunction

display ........................................... 155

Driving tips .................................... 158

Function/notes ............................. 153


Setting the specified minimum

distance ......................................... 157

Warning lamp ................................. 228

Doors

Automatic locking (on-board

computer) ...................................... 191

Automatic locking (switch) ............... 74

Central locking/unlocking

(SmartKey) ....................................... 68

Control panel ................................... 33

Display message ............................ 217

Emergency locking ........................... 75

Emergency unlocking ....................... 75


Opening (from inside) ...................... 74

Drinking and driving ......................... 144

Drinks holder

see Cup holder

Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 136

Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 133

Manual ........................................... 136

Driver's door

see Doors

Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 265

Symmetrical low beam .................... 96

Driving lamps

see Daytime running lamps

Driving on flooded roads .................. 149

Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64

Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61

Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 63

BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 60

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 60

Distance warning function ............... 60

Electronic brake force distribution ... 64

ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program) .......................................... 63

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 63

Important safety information ........... 59

Overview .......................................... 59

STEER CONTROL ............................. 64

Driving systems

Active Parking Assist ..................... 164

ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 171

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 173

Cruise control ................................ 150

Display message ............................ 209

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 152

HOLD function ............................... 160

Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 174

Lane Tracking package .................. 173

PARKTRONIC ................................. 161

Rear view camera .......................... 168

Driving tips

Automatic transmission ................. 135

Brakes ........................................... 146

Break-in period .............................. 126

Checking brake lining thickness .... 148

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 158

Downhill gradient ........................... 146

Drinking and driving ....................... 144

Driving abroad ................................. 96

Driving in winter ............................. 149

Driving on flooded roads ................ 149

Driving on wet roads ...................... 149

Exhaust check ............................... 145

Fuel ................................................ 144

General .......................................... 144

Hydroplaning ................................. 149

Icy road surfaces ........................... 149

Limited braking efficiency on

salted roads ................................... 147

Snow chains .................................. 295

Symmetrical low beam .................... 96

Wet road surface ........................... 147

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 185

DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 186

8 Index

E

EASY-VARIO-PLUS system

Cargo compartment enlargement .. 234

EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)

Display message ............................ 196

Function/notes ................................ 64

ECO display

Function/notes ............................. 145

On-board computer ....................... 183

ECO start/stop function

Deactivating/activating ................. 130

General information ....................... 128


Electronic Stability Program

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency release

Driver's door .................................... 75

Vehicle ............................................. 75

Emergency spare wheel

General notes ................................ 318


Removing ....................................... 319

Technical data ............................... 319

Emergency tensioning device

Activation ......................................... 37

Emergency Tensioning Devices

Function ........................................... 47


Emergency unlocking

Tailgate ............................................ 77

Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 21

Engine

Check Engine warning lamp ........... 226

Display message ............................ 206

ECO start/stop function ................ 128

Engine number ............................... 324

Irregular running ............................ 131

Jump-starting ................................. 283

Starting problems .......................... 131

Starting the engine with the

SmartKey ....................................... 127

Switching off .................................. 142

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 287

Engine electronics


Engine jump starting

see Jump starting (engine)

Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 262

Additives ........................................ 327

Checking the oil level ..................... 261

Checking the oil level using the

dipstick .......................................... 262

Display message ............................ 208


Notes about oil grades ................... 326

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 261

Viscosity ........................................ 327

ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program)


Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 64

Display message ............................ 194

ETS .................................................. 63

Function/notes ................................ 63


Warning lamp ................................. 222

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 63

Exhaust check ................................... 145

Exhaust pipe (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 269

Exterior lighting

Setting options ................................ 96

see Lights

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ......................................... 90

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 91

Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 91

Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 91

Folding in when locking (on-board

computer) ...................................... 192

Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 91

Setting ............................................. 91

Storing settings (memory

function) .......................................... 93

Storing the parking position ............. 92

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 231

F

Filler cap

see Fuel filler flap

First-aid kit ......................................... 274

Index 9

Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 275

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 275

TIREFIT kit ...................................... 276

see Emergency spare wheel

Floormat ............................................. 258

Fog lamps

Extended range .............................. 100

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Folding table ...................................... 232

Front fog lamps

Display message ............................ 204

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Front-passenger seat

Folding the backrest forward/

back ............................................... 233

Fuel

Additives ........................................ 326

Consumption statistics .................. 182

Displaying the current

consumption .................................. 183

Displaying the range ...................... 183

Driving tips .................................... 144

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 325


Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 325


Refueling ........................................ 139

Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 325

Fuel filler flap

Opening/closing ............................ 140

Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board

computer) ...................................... 183

Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 325


Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 288

Before changing ............................. 288

Fuse box in the engine

compartment ................................. 288

Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell .......................................... 288


G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 256


Opening/closing the garage door .. 256

Programming (button in the rear-

view mirror) ................................... 254

Gear or selector lever (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 270

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 322

Glove box ........................................... 231

H

Handbrake

see Parking brake

Hazard warning lamps ........................ 99

Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 263

Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 329

Cleaning system (function) .............. 99

Cleaning system (notes) ................ 328

Fogging up ..................................... 101

see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 87

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 87

Adjusting (manually) ........................ 87

Adjusting (rear) ................................ 87

Installing/removing (rear) ................ 88

Heating

see Climate control

High-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 105

Display message ............................ 204

Switching Adaptive Highbeam

Assist on/off ................................. 100

Switching on/off .............................. 98

Hill start assist .................................. 128

HOLD function

Deactivating ................................... 161

Display message ............................ 209

Function/notes ............................. 160

Hood

Closing ........................................... 261

Display message ............................ 217

Opening ......................................... 260

10 Index

Hydroplaning ..................................... 149

I

Ignition lock

see Key positions

Immobilizer .......................................... 65

Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 27

Settings ......................................... 189

Warning and indicator lamps ........... 28

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 178

Interior lighting ................................. 101

Automatic control .......................... 102

Delayed switch-off (on-board

computer) ...................................... 191

Emergency lighting ........................ 102

Manual control ............................... 102

Overview ........................................ 101

Reading lamp ................................. 101

Interior motion sensor ........................ 66

J

Jack

Storage location ............................ 274

Using ............................................. 313

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 283

K

Kickdown

Driving tips .................................... 135

Manual drive program .................... 137

Knee bag .............................................. 42

L

Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping Assist


Display message ............................ 210

Function/information .................... 174

Lane Tracking package ..................... 173

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat

anchors ................................................ 51

License plate lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 109

License plate lamp (display

message) ............................................ 204

Light function, active

Display message ............................ 205

Lights

Activating/deactivating the

interior lighting delayed switch-off . 191

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 97

Cornering light function ................... 99

Display message ............................ 202

Driving abroad ................................. 96

Fog lamps ........................................ 97

Fog lamps (extended) .................... 100

Hazard warning lamps ..................... 99

High beam flasher ............................ 99

High-beam headlamps ..................... 98

Light switch ..................................... 96

Low-beam headlamps ...................... 97

Parking lamps .................................. 98

Rear fog lamp .................................. 98

Standing lamps ................................ 98

Switching Adaptive Highbeam

Assist on/off ................................. 190

Switching the daytime running

lamps on/off (on-board

computer) ...................................... 190

Switching the daytime running

lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 97

Switching the exterior lighting

delayed switch-off on/off (on-

board computer) ............................ 190

Switching the surround lighting

on/off (on-board computer) .......... 190

Turn signals ..................................... 98

see Changing bulbs

see Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 205

Loading guidelines ............................ 230

Locking

see Central locking

Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 74

Emergency locking ........................... 75

From inside (central locking

button) ............................................. 74

Index 11

Locking centrally

see Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-

board computer) ............................... 191

Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 105

Display message ............................ 203

Setting for driving abroad

(symmetrical) ................................... 96

Switching on/off .............................. 97

Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar

support ............................................ 88

M

M+S tires ............................................ 294

Malfunction message


Matte finish (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 267

mbrace

Call priority .................................... 249

Display message ............................ 200

Downloading destinations

(COMAND) ..................................... 249

Downloading routes ....................... 252

Emergency call .............................. 246

Geo fencing ................................... 253


Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 251

MB info call button ........................ 248

Remote vehicle locking .................. 251

Roadside Assistance button .......... 247

Search & Send ............................... 250

Self-test ......................................... 246

Speed alert .................................... 253

System .......................................... 245

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 253

Vehicle remote malfunction

diagnosis ....................................... 251

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 250

Mechanical key

Function/notes ................................ 69

Locking vehicle ................................ 75

Unlocking the driver's door .............. 75

Memory card (audio) ......................... 185

Memory function ................................. 93

Message memory (on-board

computer) .......................................... 193

Messages


Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors

see Rear-view mirror

see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 186

Modifying the programming

(SmartKey) ........................................... 69

MOExtended tires .............................. 275

Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 315

Mounting a new wheel ................... 315

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 312

Raising the vehicle ......................... 313

Removing a wheel .......................... 315

Securing the vehicle against

rolling away ................................... 313

MP3

Operation ....................................... 185


Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 181

Permanent display ......................... 190

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the on-board computer . 180

Overview .......................................... 29

N

Navigation



Notes on breaking-in a new

vehicle ................................................ 126

O

Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 47


Odometer

see Trip odometer

Oil

see Engine oil

12 Index

On-board computer

Assistance menu ........................... 187

Audio menu ................................... 185

Convenience submenu .................. 192

Displaying a service message ........ 264

Display messages .......................... 193

Factory settings submenu ............. 192


Lighting submenu .......................... 190

Menu overview .............................. 182

Message memory .......................... 193

Navigation menu ............................ 184

Operation ....................................... 180

Service menu ................................. 189

Settings menu ............................... 189

Standard display ............................ 182

Telephone menu ............................ 186

Trip menu ...................................... 182

Vehicle submenu ........................... 191

Video DVD operation ..................... 186

Opening and closing the side trim

panels ................................................. 106

Operating system

see On-board computer

Outside temperature display ........... 179

Overhead control panel ...................... 32

Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 58

P

Paint code number ............................ 323

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 267

Panic alarm .......................................... 36

Panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel

Opening/closing the roller

sunblind ........................................... 81


Resetting ......................................... 81

Panorama sliding sunroof


Parcel net ........................................... 233

Parking ............................................... 141


Parking brake ................................ 142

Position of exterior mirror, front-

passenger side ................................. 92

Rear view camera .......................... 168

see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid

Active Parking Assist ..................... 164

see Exterior mirrors

see PARKTRONIC

Parking brake

Display message ............................ 197

Electric parking brake .................... 142

Warning lamp ................................. 225

Parking lamps

Switching on/off .............................. 98

Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 105

PARKTRONIC


Driving system ............................... 161

Function/notes ............................. 161



Range of the sensors ..................... 162

Warning display ............................. 162

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator

lamp ...................................................... 50

Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 269

Power washers .................................. 266

Power windows

see Side windows

Product information ............................ 20

Program selector button .................. 135

Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 20

Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 127

Q

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 23

R

Radar sensor system


Display message ............................ 209

Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 185


Index 13

Reading lamp ..................................... 101

Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 124

Rear fog lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 107

Display message ............................ 204

Switching on/off .............................. 98

Rear lamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 107

Rear seat

Adjusting the angle of the

backrests ....................................... 236

Folding the backrest forwards/

back (vehicles without the EASY-

VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 234

Folding the backrest forwards/

back (vehicles with the EASY-


Fore-and-aft adjustment ................ 237

Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 269

Function/notes ............................. 168

Switching on/off ........................... 169

Rear-view mirror

Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 90

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 91

Rear window defroster


Switching on/off ........................... 122

Rear window wiper

Replacing the wiper blade .............. 111

Switching on/off ........................... 110

Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27


Refueling process .......................... 140

see Fuel

Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 253

Programming (garage door

opener) .......................................... 254

Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel

Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 208

Warning lamp ................................. 226

see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 122

Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 21

Roller sunblind

Opening/closing .............................. 81

Panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel ..................................... 81

Roof carrier ........................................ 240

Roof lining and carpets (cleaning

guidelines) ......................................... 271

Roof load (maximum) ........................ 329

Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)

Route guidance (navigation) ............ 184

S

Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 47

Child restraint systems .................... 47

Safety systems

see Driving safety systems

Seat

Folding the backrest (rear

compartment) forwards/back

(vehicles without the EASY-


Folding the backrest (rear

compartment) forwards/back

(vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-

PLUS system) ................................ 235

Seat belts

Adjusting the height ......................... 45

Belt force limiters ............................ 47

Cleaning ......................................... 271

Correct usage .................................. 44

Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 47

Fastening ......................................... 45

Important safety guidelines ............. 43

Releasing ......................................... 46


Warning lamp ................................. 218

Warning lamp (function) ................... 46

Seats

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 87


14 Index

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar

support ............................................ 88

Adjusting the head restraint ............ 87

Cleaning the cover ......................... 270

Correct driver's seat position ........... 84


Seat heating problem ...................... 89

Storing settings (memory

function) .......................................... 93

Switching seat heating on/off ......... 89

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 269

Service

see ASSYST PLUS

Service menu (on-board computer) . 189

Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 327

Coolant (engine) ............................ 327

Engine oil ....................................... 326

Fuel ................................................ 324


Washer fluid ................................... 328

Service work

see ASSYST PLUS

Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 192

On-board computer ....................... 189

Setting the air distribution ............... 120

Setting the airflow ............................ 120

Side impact air bag ............................. 42

Side marker lamp (display

message) ............................................ 205

Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 268

Convenience closing feature ............ 78

Convenience opening feature .......... 78


Opening/closing .............................. 78


Resetting ......................................... 79

Sliding sunroof

see Panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel

SmartKey

Changing the battery ....................... 70

Changing the programming ............. 69

Checking the battery ....................... 70

Convenience closing feature ............ 78

Convenience opening feature .......... 78

Display message ............................ 218

Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68


Loss ................................................. 72

Mechanical key ................................ 69

Positions (ignition lock) ................. 127


Starting the engine ........................ 127

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) . . 127

Snow chains ...................................... 295

Sockets

Center console .............................. 244

Luggage compartment ................... 245

Points to observe before use ......... 244

Rear compartment ......................... 245

Specialist workshop ............................ 23

Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the

additional speedometer ................. 189

Digital ............................................ 183

In the Instrument cluster ................. 27

Segments ...................................... 179

Selecting the unit of

measurement ................................ 189


SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Display message ............................ 201

Introduction ..................................... 37

Warning lamp ................................. 225

Warning lamp (function) ................... 37

Standing lamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 105

Display message ............................ 204

Switching on/off .............................. 98

Starting (engine) ................................ 127

STEER CONTROL .................................. 64

Steering (display message) .............. 217

Steering wheel


Button overview ............................... 29

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 180

Cleaning ......................................... 270


Paddle shifters ............................... 136

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 136

Index 15

Stowage areas ................................... 230

Stowage compartments

Armrest (front) ............................... 231

Armrest (under) ............................. 232

Center console .............................. 231

Cup holders ................................... 241

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 231

Glove box ....................................... 231

Important safety information ......... 230

Parcel net ...................................... 233

Under driver's seat/front-

passenger seat .............................. 232

Stowage space

Center console (rear) ..................... 232

Summer tires ..................................... 294

Sun visor ............................................ 242

Supplement Restraint System

see SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System)

Surround lighting (on-board

computer) .......................................... 190

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off ................................................. 122

Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 65

T

Tachometer ........................................ 179

Tailgate

Display message ............................ 217



Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 76

Opening dimensions ...................... 329

Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 204

Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27

Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 324

Emergency spare wheel ................. 319

Information .................................... 322

Tires/wheels ................................. 316

Vehicle data ................................... 329

TELEAID

Call priority .................................... 249


(COMAND) ..................................... 249

Downloading routes ....................... 252

Emergency call .............................. 246

Geo fencing ................................... 253


Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 251

MB info call button ........................ 248

Remote vehicle locking .................. 251

Roadside Assistance button .......... 247

Search & Send ............................... 250

Self-test ......................................... 246

Speed alert .................................... 253

System .......................................... 245

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 253

Vehicle remote malfunction

diagnosis ....................................... 251

Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 250

Telephone

Accepting a call ............................. 186

Display message ............................ 217


Number from the phone book ........ 187

Redialing ........................................ 187

Rejecting/ending a call ................. 186

Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 179

Outside temperature ...................... 179

Setting (climate control) ................ 119

Theft deterrent systems

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65

Immobilizer ...................................... 65

Through-loading ................................ 233

Time

see Separate Operator's Manual

TIREFIT kit .......................................... 276

Tire pressure

Checking manually ........................ 298

Display message ............................ 214

Maximum ....................................... 298

Notes ............................................. 297

Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 278

Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 278

Recommended ............................... 295

Tire pressure loss warning system


Restarting ...................................... 299

Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 311

16 Index

Average weight of the vehicle

occupants (definition) .................... 309

Bar (definition) ............................... 309

Changing a wheel .......................... 312

Characteristics .............................. 309

Checking ........................................ 293

Definition of terms ......................... 309

Direction of rotation ...................... 312

Display message ............................ 214

Distribution of the vehicle

occupants (definition) .................... 311

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................... 308

DOT (Department of

Transportation) (definition) ............ 309

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(definition) ..................................... 310

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

(definition) ..................................... 310

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) (definition) ......................... 310


Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment (definition) ...... 309

Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 310

Labeling (overview) ........................ 305

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 311

Load index ..................................... 308

Load index (definition) ................... 310

M+S tires ....................................... 294

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(definition) ..................................... 310

Maximum load on a tire

(definition) ..................................... 310

Maximum permissible tire

pressure (definition) ....................... 310

Maximum tire load ......................... 303

Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 310

MOExtended tires .......................... 294

Optional equipment weight

(definition) ..................................... 311

PSI (pounds per square inch)

(definition) ..................................... 310

Replacing ....................................... 312

Service life ..................................... 294

Sidewall (definition) ....................... 311

Speed rating (definition) ................ 310

Storing ........................................... 312

Structure and characteristics

(definition) ..................................... 309

Summer tires ................................. 294

Temperature .................................. 305

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

(definition) ..................................... 311

Tire bead (definition) ...................... 311

Tire pressure (definition) ................ 311

Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 309

Tire size (data) ............................... 316

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity, speed rating .................... 306

Tire tread ....................................... 293

Tire tread (definition) ..................... 311

Total load limit (definition) ............. 311

Traction ......................................... 304

Traction (definition) ....................... 311

Tread wear ..................................... 304

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards ...................................... 304


Standards (definition) .................... 309

Unladen weight (definition) ............ 310

Wear indicator (definition) ............. 311

Wheel rim (definition) .................... 309

see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 52

Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 285

Installing the towing eye ................ 286

Removing the towing eye ............... 286

Towing away

With both axles on the ground ....... 286

With front axle raised ..................... 286

Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 287


Installing the towing eye ................ 286

Removing the towing eye ............... 286

Traction control ................................... 63

Transmission

see Automatic transmission

Transmission position display ......... 133

Transporting the vehicle .................. 287

Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 270

Trip computer (on-board

computer) .......................................... 182

Index 17

Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 182

Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 183

Trunk

see Tailgate

Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 106

Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 107

Display message ............................ 203

Switching on/off .............................. 98

Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

U

Unlocking


From inside the vehicle (central

unlocking button) ............................. 74

V

Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 242

Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 24

Data acquisition ............................... 24

Equipment ....................................... 21

Individual settings .......................... 189

Limited Warranty ............................. 24

Loading .......................................... 300

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 75

Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68

Lowering ........................................ 315

Maintenance .................................... 21

Parking for a long period ................ 144

Pulling away ................................... 127

Raising ........................................... 313

Reporting problems ......................... 24

Securing from rolling away ............ 313

Towing away .................................. 285

Tow-starting ................................... 285

Transporting .................................. 287

Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 75

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68

Vehicle data ................................... 329

Vehicle data ....................................... 329

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 329

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 75

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate .............. 323

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 274

Video (DVD) ........................................ 186

VIN ...................................................... 323

W

Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 220

Brakes ........................................... 220

Check Engine ................................. 226

Coolant .......................................... 226

Distance warning ........................... 228

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 228

ESP® .............................................. 222

ESP® OFF ....................................... 223

Fuel tank ........................................ 226

Overview .......................................... 28

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 50

Reserve fuel ................................... 226

Seat belt ........................................ 218

SRS ................................................ 225

Warranty ............................................ 323

Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 217

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 315

Wheel chock ...................................... 313

Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 312

Checking ........................................ 293

Cleaning ......................................... 267

Cleaning (warning) ......................... 312

Emergency spare wheel ................. 318


Interchanging/changing ................ 312

Mounting a new wheel ................... 315

Mounting a wheel .......................... 312

Removing a wheel .......................... 315

Storing ........................................... 312

Tightening torque ........................... 315

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 316

Window curtain air bag

Display message ............................ 202

Operation ......................................... 42

Windows

see Side windows

18 Index

Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 121

Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 263


Notes ............................................. 328

Windshield wipers


Rear window wiper ........................ 110

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 110

Switching on/off ........................... 109

Winter driving

Slippery road surfaces ................... 149

Snow chains .................................. 295

Winter operation

General notes ................................ 294

Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 294

Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 268


Replacing (rear window) ................ 111

Replacing (windshield) ................... 110

Wooden trim (cleaning

instructions) ...................................... 270

Workshops


Index 19

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental note

Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated

environmental protection.

The objectives are for the natural resources

that form the basis of our existence on this

planet to be used sparingly and in a manner

that takes the requirements of both nature

and humanity into account.

You too can help to protect the environment

by operating your vehicle in an

environmentally responsible manner.

Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,

transmission, brake and tire wear depend on

the following factors:

Roperating conditions of your vehicle

Ryour personal driving style

You can influence both factors. You should

bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel

consumption.

Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.

Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.

Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel

consumption.

Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.

Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You should

therefore adhere to the service intervals.

Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.

Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicle

is stationary.

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.

Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Environmental concerns and

recommendations

Wherever the operating instructions require

you to dispose of materials, first try to

regenerate or re-use them. Observe the

relevant environmental rules and regulations

when disposing of materials. In this way you

will help to protect the environment.

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use

genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion

parts and accessories that have been

approved for your vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as

conversion parts and accessories that have

been specifically approved for your vehicle for

their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite

ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is

unable to assess other parts. Therefore,

Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for

the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz

vehicles. This is also the case, even if they

have been independently or officially

approved. The use of non-approved parts

could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved

conversion parts and accessories are

available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz

Center. Here, you will receive advice about

permissible technical modifications, and the

parts will be professionally installed.

20 Introduction

Operator's Manual

General notes

Before you first drive off, read this Operator's

Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with

your vehicle.

For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,

follow the instructions and warning notices in

this manual. Disregarding them may lead to

damage to the vehicle or personal injury.

Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard

of the instructions is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipment

This Operator's Manual describes all models

and all standard and optional equipment of

your vehicle available at the time of going to

print. Country-specific differences are

possible. Please note that your vehicle may

not be equipped with all features described.

This also applies to safety-related systems

and functions. The equipment in your vehicle

may therefore differ from some of the

descriptions or illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all

systems installed in your vehicle.

Contact an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter

if you have any questions about equipment or

operation.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance

Booklet are important documents and should

be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literature

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and

Warranty Information booklet. Your

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

exchange or repair any defective parts

originally installed in the vehicle in

accordance with the terms of the following

warranties:

RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission Systems Warranty

REmission Performance Warranty

RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island and Vermont Emission

Control Systems Warranty

RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Maintenance

The Service and Warranty Booklet describes

all the necessary maintenance work which

should be done at regular intervals.

Always have the Service and Warranty

Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle

to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The

service advisor will record every service for

you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program offers technical help in the event of

a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside

Assistance Hotline are answered by our

agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)

(USA)

1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

For additional information, refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside

Introduction 21

Z

Assistance" section in the Service and

Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both

in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of

ownership

In the event of a change of address, please

send us the "Notification of Address Change"

in the Service and Guarantee booklet or

simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline

number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service Center (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in

contacting you in a timely manner should the

need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the

entire literature in the vehicle so that it is

available to the next owner.

If you have purchased a used car, please send

us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply

call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center (USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign

countries, please be aware that:

Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.

Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

convertermay not be available. Leaded fuel

may cause damage to the catalytic

converter.

Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause

engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available

for delivery in Europe through our European

Delivery Program. For details, consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to

one of the following addresses.

In the USA


European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada


European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING

Work improperly carried out on electronic

components and associated software could

cause them to cease functioning. Because the

vehicle's electronic components are

interconnected, any modifications made may

produce an undesired effect on other

systems. Electronic malfunctions could

seriously impair the operating safety of your

vehicle.

Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center

for repairs or modifications to electronic

components.

Other improper work or modifications on the

vehicle could also have a negative impact on

the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function when the

engine is running. You should therefore never

turn off the engine while driving.

G WARNING

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or

tires/wheels may cause serious damage and

impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

Such blows can be caused, for example, by

running over an obstacle, road debris or a

pothole.

22 Introduction

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or

ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage

to your vehicle has occurred:

Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.

Rslow down carefully.

Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe

distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/

wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle

appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other

qualified maintenance or repair facility for

further inspection or repairs.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive

and/or transmit radio waves

USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle

comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: 1) These devices may not cause

harmful interference, and 2) These devices

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation. Changes or

modifications not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle

comply with Industry Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) These devices

may not cause interference, and (2) These

devices must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

G WARNING

If you connect equipment to the on-board

diagnostics connection, it can affect the

operation of the vehicle systems. This can

impair the operating safety of your vehicle

while driving. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not connect any equipment to the on-

board diagnostics connection.

G WARNING

Loose equipment or equipment cables which

are connected to the on-board diagnostics

connection can obstruct the area around the

pedals. The equipment or the cables could

come between the pedals in the event of

sudden braking or acceleration. This may

affect the function of the pedals. There is a

risk of an accident.

Do not attach any equipment or cables in the

driver's footwell.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connection

is used, the starter battery may discharge.

The diagnostics connection is only intended

for the connection of diagnostic equipment at

a qualified specialist workshop.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics

connection can, for example, lead to

emissions monitoring information being

reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to

meet the requirements of the next emissions

test during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a

qualified specialist workshop. It has the

necessary specialist knowledge, tools and

qualifications to correctly carry out the work

required on your vehicle. This is especially the

case for work relevant to safety.

Observe the notes in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

Rwork relevant to safety

Rservice and maintenance work

Introduction 23

Z

Rrepair work

Ralterations, installation work and

modifications

Rwork on electronic components

Correct use

G WARNING

There are various warning stickers affixed to

your vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you and

others to various dangers. Therefore, do not

remove any warning stickers unless the

sticker clearly states that you may do so.

If you remove any warning stickers, you or

others could fail to recognize certain dangers

and be injured.

When driving your vehicle observe the

following information:

Rthe safety notes in this manual

Rthe Technical Data section in this manual

Rtraffic rules and regulations

Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your

vehicle, particularly one that you believe may

affect its safe operation, we urge you to

contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

immediately to have the problem diagnosed

and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to

your satisfaction, please discuss the problem

again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or

contact us at one of the following addresses.

In the USA

Customer Assistance Center


One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada

Customer Relations Department


98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Limited Warranty

! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicle

as well as about possible vehicle damage.

Damage to your vehicle that arises from

culpable contraventions against these

instructions is not covered either by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the

New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic data

acquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code

§ 9951)

Your vehicle records electronic data. If your

vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:

TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of

an accident.

This information helps, for example, to test

vehicle systems after an accident and to

continually improve vehicle safety.

Daimler AG can access this data and submit

it:

Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposes

Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner

Ron the instruction of prosecuting

authorities

Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that

involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales

and service organizations

Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

AID) purchase agreement to find out more

about data that can be recorded and

transmitted by this system.

24 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 26

Instrument cluster .............................. 27

Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29

Center console .................................... 30

Overhead control panel ...................... 32

Door control panel .............................. 33

25

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 136

; Combination switch 98

= Instrument cluster 27

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 133

B PARKTRONIC warning

display 161

C Overhead control panel 32

D Climate control systems 114

Function Page

E Ignition lock 127

F Adjusting the steering

wheel 89

G Cruise control lever 150

H Electric parking brake 142

I Light switch 96

J Diagnostics connection 23

K Opening the hood 260

26 CockpitAtaglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page

: Speedometer with

segments 179

; Multifunction display 181

= Tachometer 179

Function Page

? Coolant temperature 179

A Fuel gage

B Instrument lighting 178

Instrument cluster 27

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: L Low-beam

headlamps 97

; T Parking lamps 98

= K High-beam

headlamps 98

? ÷ ESP® 222

A ! Electric parking brake

(red) 225

B ! Electric parking brake

(yellow) 225

C · Distance warning 228

D #! Turn signals 98

Function Page

E 6 SRS 225

F ü Seat belt 218

G ? Coolant 226

H R Rear fog lamp 98

I N Front fog lamps 97

J ; Check Engine 226

K æ Reserve fuel 226

L å ESP® OFF 222

M ! ABS 220

N J Brakes 220

28 Instrument clusterAtaglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 181

; Audio/COMAND display;

see the separate operating

instructions

= ?

Switches on the Voice

Control System; see the

separate operating

instructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 186

Exits phone book/redial

memory

6

Makes or accepts a call

Switches to the redial

memory

WX

Adjusts the volume

8

Mute

Function Page

A =;

Selects a menu 180

9:

Selects a submenu or

scrolls through lists 180

a

Confirms your selection 180

Hides display messages 193

B %

Back 180

Switches off the Voice

Control System; see the

separate operating

instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 29

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Audio system/COMAND;

see the separate operating

instructions

; c Seat heating 89

= c PARKTRONIC 161

? ¤ ECO start/stop

function 128

Function Page

A £ Hazard warning

lamps 99

B 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG

OFF indicator lamp 50

C Ú Selects the drive

program 135

30 Center consoleAtaglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

D Ashtray 242

Cigarette lighter 243

Power socket 244

Stowage compartment 230

E Stowage compartment 230

Function Page

F Cup holders 241

G Stowage compartment 230

H Audio/COMAND

controller; see the separate

operating instructions

Center console 31

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rear

interior lighting on/off 102

; p Switches the right-

hand reading lamp on/off 101

= | Switches the front

interior lighting/automatic

interior lighting control off 102

? ï MB Info call button

(mbrace system) 248

A Rear-view mirror 90

B Buttons for the garage door

opener 256

C G SOS button (mbrace

system) 246

Function Page

D F Roadside Assistance

call button (mbrace

system) 247

E Eyeglasses compartment 231

F 3 Opens/closes the

panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel with roller

sunblinds 80

G c Switches the front

interior lighting on 102

H p Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 101

32 Overhead control panelAtaglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 74

; %& Unlocks/locks

the vehicle 74

= r45= Saves

the seat and exterior mirror

settings 93

? Adjusts the seats

electrically 87

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the

exterior mirrors in/out

electrically 90

Function Page

B W Opens/closes the

side windows 78

C n Activates/

deactivates the override

feature for the side

windows in the rear

compartment 58

Door control panel 33

Ataglance

Useful information .............................. 36

Panic alarm .......................................... 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36

Children in the vehicle ........................ 47

Driving safety systems ....................... 59

Theft deterrent locking system ......... 65

35

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional

equipment of your vehicle available at the

time of publication of the Operator's

Manual. Country-specific differences are


not be equipped with all features

described. This also applies to safety-

related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for at

least one second.

An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting

flashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:

again.

or

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

i This device complies with RSS-Gen ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this

device could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

The Product label with FCC ID and IC

certification number can be found in the

battery case of the SmartKey.

Occupant safety


G WARNING

Modifications to or work improperly

conducted on restraint system components

or their wiring, as well as tampering with

interconnected electronic systems, can lead

to the restraint systems no longer functioning

as intended.

Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices

(ETDs), for example, could deploy

inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents

although the deceleration threshold for air

bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,

never modify the restraint systems. Do not

tamper with electronic components or their

software.

In this section, you will learn the most

important facts about the restraint system

components of the vehicle.

The restraint system consists of:

Rseat belts

Rchild restraint systems

RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

Additional protection is provided by:

RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

RPRE-SAFE®

RAir bag system components with the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The different air bag systems work

independently of each other. The protective

functions of the system work in conjunction

with each other. Not all air bags are always

deployed in an accident.

36 Occupant safetySafety

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraint

systems for infants and children, see

"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 47).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Introduction

SRS consists of:

Rthe6 SRS warning lamp

Rair bags

Rair bag control unit (with crash sensors)

REmergency Tensioning Devices for the

front seat belts and the outer seat belts in

the rear

Rseat belt force limiters for the front seat

belts and the outer seat belts in the rear

SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming

into contact with the vehicle's interior in the

event of an accident. It can also reduce the

effect of the forces to which occupants are

subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNING

The SRS self-check has detected a

malfunction if the6 SRS indicator lamp:

Rdoes not light up at all

Rdoes not go out after approximately four

seconds after the engine is started

Rlights up after the engine is started or while

the vehicle is in motion

For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly

recommends that you have the system

checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail

to activate when it is needed in the event of

an accident, which could lead to serious or

fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated

unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could

also result in injury.

In addition, work carried out improperly on

SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause

unintended air bag deployment. Work on the

SRS system should only be carried out by

qualified specialist personnel. Consult a


If it is necessary to modify an air bag system

to accommodate a person with disabilities,

contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

for details. USA only: for further information,

contact our Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up when the ignition is switched

on. It goes out no later than a few seconds

after the engine is started.

SRS functions are checked regularlywhen the

engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions

can be detected in good time.

The SRS components are in operational

readiness when the6 SRS warning lamp

goes out while the engine is running.

Triggering of Emergency Tensioning

Devices (ETDs), belt force limiters and

air bags

During the first stage of a collision, the air bag

control unit evaluates important physical

data relating to vehicle deceleration or

acceleration, such as:

Rduration

Rdirection

Rmagnitude

Based on the evaluation of this data, the air

bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the

belt tensioners in the first stage.

If there is an even higher rate of vehicle

deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal

direction, the front air bags are also deployed.

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air

bags. The air bag control unit evaluates

vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the

event of a collision. In the first deployment

stage, the front air bag is filled with enough

propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.

The front air bag is fully deployed if a second

Occupant safety 37

Safety

Z

deployment threshold is reached within a few

milliseconds.

The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bag

triggering thresholds are variable and are

adapted to the detected rate of deceleration

or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is

pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process

must take place in good time at the start of

the collision.

The rate of vehicle deceleration or

acceleration and the direction of the force are

essentially determined by:

Rthe distribution of forces during the

collision

Rthe collision angle

Rthe deformation characteristics of the

vehicle

Rthe characteristics of the object with which

the vehicle has collided

Factors that can only be seen and measured

after a collision has occurred do not play a

decisive role in the deployment of an air bag,

nor do they provide an indication of air bag

deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly,

e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bag

being deployed. This is the case if only parts

which are relatively easily deformed are

affected and the rate of deceleration is not

high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed

even though the vehicle suffers only minor

deformation. This is the case if, for example,

very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal

body members are hit, and sufficient

deceleration occurs as a result.

i The front Emergency Tensioning Devicescan only be triggered if the seat belt

tongues on the front seats are correctly

engaged in the seat belt buckles.

i Not all air bags are deployed in anaccident. The different air bag systems

work independently of each other.

How the air bag system works is

determined by predicting the severity of

the accident, especially vehicle

deceleration or acceleration, and the type

of accident:

Rhead-on collision

Rside impact

Safety guidelines for seat belts,

Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)

and air bags

G WARNING

RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accident

must be replaced. Their anchoring points

must also be checked. Only use seat belts

installed or supplied by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain

perchlorate material, which may require

special handling and regard for the

environment. Check your national disposal

guidelines. California residents, see

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/

Perchlorate/index.cfm.

RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD

that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-

SAFE® has electrically operated reversible

belt tensioners in addition to the

pyrotechnic ETDs.

RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.

RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.

RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they may

not be able to provide adequate protection.

RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.

RDo not change or remove any component

or part of the SRS.


RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. to the:

- padded steering wheel boss

- knee bag covers

- front-passenger air bag cover

- outer side of front seat bolsters

- outer side of rear bench seat backrest

seat bolsters

- roof lining trim

RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRS

components and wiring.

RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,

umbrellas, etc.).

RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over the

door. These items may be thrown around in

the vehicle and cause head and other

injuries when the window curtain air bag is

deployed.

RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.

RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always

keep both feet on the floor in front of the

seat.

RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or

causing unintended air bag deployment.

Work on the SRS must therefore only be

performed by qualified technicians.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit or

ETD, our safety instructions must be

followed. These instructions are available

from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the material

of the air bags, there is the possibility of

abrasions or other, potentiallymore serious

injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz

strongly recommends that you inform the

subsequent owner that the vehicle is

equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the

applicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags


G WARNING

Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence

of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:

Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags and driver's knee

bag)

Rside impacts (side impact air bags and

window curtain air bags)

Rrollover (window curtain air bags)

However, no system available today can

completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

When the air bags are deployed, a small

amount of powder is released. The powder

generally does not constitute a health hazard

and does not indicate that there is a fire in the

vehicle. In order to prevent potential

breathing difficulties, you should leave the

vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you

have any breathing difficulty but cannot get

out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,

then get fresh air by opening a window or

door.

G WARNING

In order to reduce the potential danger of

injuries caused during the deployment of the

front air bags, the driver and front passenger

must always be correctly seated and wear

their seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a

collision, you must always be in the normal

seat position with your back against the

backrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake sure

that it is correctly positioned on your body.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

As the air bag inflates with considerable

speed and force, a proper seating position

and correct positioning of the hands on the

steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe

distance from the air bag. Occupants who are

not wearing their seat belt, are not seated

properly or are too close to the air bag can be

seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it

inflates with great force instantaneously:

Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and

in a position that is as upright as possible

with your back against the backrest.

Rmove the driver's seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operation

of vehicle controls. The distance from the

center of the driver's chest to the center of

the air bag cover on the steering wheel

must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You

should be able to accomplish this by

adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If

you have any difficulties, please contact an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.

Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim can

increase the risk and potential severity of

hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag

inflates.

Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible from the dashboard when the

seat is occupied.

Roccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their heads

in the area of the door where the side

impact air bag inflates. This could result in

serious or fatal injuries should the side

impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as

upright as possible, wear the seat belt

properly and use an appropriately sized

infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster

seat recommended for the size and weight

of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can result

in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you

make the buyer aware of this safety

information. Be sure to give the buyer this

Operator's Manual.

G WARNING

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.

A side impact air bag related injury may occur

if occupants, especially children, are not

properly seated or restrained when next to a

side impact air bag which needs to deploy

rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please

follow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible

and use the seat belts properly.

Make sure that children 12 years

old and under use an appropriately

sized child restraint, infant

restraint, or booster seat

recommended for the size and

weight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a

bang, and a small amount of powder may also

be released. Only in rare cases will the bang

affect your hearing. The powder that is

released generally does not constitute a

health hazard. The6 SRS warning lamp

lights up.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bag

control unit detects the need for deployment.

Only in the event of such a situation will the

air bags provide their supplemental

protection.

If the driver and front passenger do not wear

their seat belts, it is not possible for the air

bags to provide their supplemental

protection.

In the event of other types of impacts and

impacts below air bag deployment

thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The

driver and passengers will then be protected

to the extent possible by a properly fastened


seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also

needed to provide the best possible

protection if the vehicle rolls over.

Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.

Always wear your seat belt, regardless of

whether or not your vehicle is equipped with

air bags.

It is important for your safety and that of your

passengers to have deployed air bags

replaced and to have any malfunctioning air

bags repaired. This will help to make sure the

air bagswill continue to provide supplemental

crash protection for occupants.

Front air bags

! Make sure that there are no objectsexerting force on the front-passenger seat.

This could cause the system to identify the

seat as being occupied, and in the event of

an accident, the restraint systems on the

front-passenger side might be triggered.

Have triggered restraint systems replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the

steering wheel; front-passenger front air

bag; deploys in front of and above the glove

box.

The front air bags increase protection for the

driver's and front-passenger's head and

chest.

They are deployed:

Rin the event of certain frontal impacts

Rif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protection

to that provided by the seat belt

Rdepending onwhether the seat belt is being

used

Rindependently of other air bags in the

vehicle

If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are

generally not deployed. If the system detects

high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal

direction, the front air bags are deployed.

Front-passenger air bag; is only activated

if the system determines that the front-

passenger seat is occupied. The4PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on

the center console does not light up

(Y page 50).

When a child restraint system is installed on

the front-passenger seat and the4PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in

the center console does not light up:

Ra child restraint system without a

transponder for the air bag deactivation

system is installed or

Ra child restraint system with a transponder

has not been installed properly.

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air

bags. The air bag control unit evaluates

vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the

event of a collision. In the first deployment

stage, the front air bag is filled with part of the

total available propellant gas, thereby

reducing the risk of injury. If the air bag

control unit recognizes within a few

milliseconds that the vehicle is being braked

or accelerated faster than originally

predicted, the front air bag is filled with the

maximum amount of propellant gas available.

The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the

higher the vehicle deceleration rate required

(predicted at the start of the impact) for

second stage inflation of the front-passenger

front air bag. In the second stage, the front

air bags are inflated with the maximum

amount of propellant gas available.

The front air bags are not deployed in

situations where a low impact severity is

predicted. You will then be protected by the

fastened seat belt.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

The front-passenger front air bag will only

deploy if:

Rthe45 indicator lamp in the center

console is not lit (Y page 50).

Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high

impact severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: increases the driver's

protection against:

Rknee injuries

Rthigh injuries

Rlower leg injuries

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the

steering column. If, during a frontal collision,

the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protection to

that provided by the seat belt, driver's knee

bag: is deployed along with the driver's air

bag. Driver's knee bag: operates best in

conjunction with correctly positioned and

fastened seat belts.

Side impact air bags

G WARNING

If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that, for safety reasons, you

only use seat covers that have been approved

for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

The seat coversmust have a special tear seam

for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags cannot

deploy correctly and would fail to provide the

intended protection in the event of an

accident. Suitable seat covers can be

obtained, for example, from a Mercedes-Benz

Service Centre.

Example: side impact air bags on the driver's side

Front side impact air bags: and rear side

impact air bags; deploy next to the outer

seat cushions.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offer

additional protection for the thorax and, on

the front seats, the pelvis of the vehicle

occupants on the side of the vehicle on which

the impact occurs. However, they do not

protect the:

Rhead

Rneck

Rarms

Window curtain air bags

Example: window curtain air bags on the front-passenger side

Window curtain air bags: are integrated

into the side of the roof frame and deploy in

the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.


When deployed, window curtain air bags:

increase protection for the heads of vehicle

occupants on the side of the vehicle on which

the impact occurs. However, they do not

protect the:

Rchest

Rarms

They are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occurs

Rat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration or

acceleration, e.g. in a side impact

Rregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupied

Rindependently of the use of the seat belt

Rindependently of the front air bags

Window curtain air bags: will not deploy in

impacts with deceleration rates which do not

exceed the system's preset deployment

thresholds for vehicle deceleration or

acceleration. You will then be protected by

the fastened seat belt.

Seat belts


G WARNING

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.

Always make sure all of your passengers are

properly restrained. You and your passengers

should always wear seat belts.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and

position your seat belt greatly increases your

risk of injuries and their likely severity in an

accident.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can

be considerably more severe without your

seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat

belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit

the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from

it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or

death is lessened if you are properly wearing

your seat belt. The air bags can only protect

as intended if the occupants are properly

wearing their seat belts.

G WARNING

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat

backrest in an excessively reclined position as

this can be dangerous. You could slide under

the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under

it, the seat belt would apply force at the

abdomen or neck. That could cause serious

or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and

seat belt provide the best restraint when the

wearer is in a position that is as upright as

possible and the seat belt is properly

positioned on the body.

G WARNING

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than

there are seat belts available. Make sure

everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly

restrained with a separate seat belt. Never

use a seat belt for more than one person at a

time.

G WARNING

Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accident must

be replaced and their anchoring points must

also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved

by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat

belts. This can lead to unintended activation

of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when

necessary.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they may


Have all work carried out only by qualified

technicians. Contact an authorized


The use of infant or child restraints is required

by law in all 50 states, the District of

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Columbia, the U.S. territories and all

Canadian provinces.

Even where this is not the case, all vehicle

occupants should have their seat belts

fastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 47) for further information on

infants and children traveling in the vehicle

as well as on child restraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNING

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

RSeat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any other

way than as described in this section, as

that could result in serious injuries in the

event of an accident.

REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reduce

the likelihood of and potential severity of

injuries in accidents, including rollovers.

The integrated restraint system includes

SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee

bag, front-passenger front air bag, side

impact air bags, window curtain air bags for

the side windows), Emergency Tensioning

Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front

seat knee bolsters.

The system is designed to enhance the

protection offered to properly belted

occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,

driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side

(side impact air bags, window curtain air

bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed

preset deployment thresholds and in

certain rollovers (window curtain air bags

and ETDs).

RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

In a frontal crash, your body would move

too far forward. That would increase the

chance of head and neck injuries. The seat

belt would also apply too much force to the

ribs or abdomen, which could severely

injure internal organs such as your liver or

spleen.

Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder

section is located as close as possible to

the middle of the shoulder. It should not

touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder

portion of the seat belt under your arm. For

this purpose, you can adjust the height of

the seat belt outlet.

RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. If

the lap belt is positioned across your

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in

a crash.

RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,

such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as

these might cause injuries.

RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this when

wearing loose clothing.

RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt

around a person and another person or

other objects at the same time.

RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width of

the seat belt to distribute impact forces.

The twisted seat belt against your body

could cause injuries.

RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion

should be positioned as low as possible on

the hips to avoid any possible pressure on

the abdomen.

RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.

RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.

RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always

keep both feet on the floor in front of the

seat.

RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children in


booster seats, always follow the child seat

manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNING

Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They

could tear.

Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the

door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.

This could damage the seat belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat

belts. This could impair the effectiveness of

the seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNING

According to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained on the rear

seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,

we strongly recommend that children be

placed in the rear seat whenever possible.

Regardless of seating position, children 12

years old and under must be seated and

properly secured in an appropriately sized

child restraint system or booster seat

recommended for the size and weight of the

child. For additional information, see the

"Children in the vehicle" section.

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is

significantly increased if the child restraints

are not properly secured in the vehicle and/

or the child is not properly secured in the child

restraint.

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to

an almost vertical position (Y page 84).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt

sash guide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder

section of the seat belt across the middle

of your shoulder and the lap section across

your pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the

appropriate height (Y page 45).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

section of the seat belt to tighten the belt

across your body.

Formore information about releasing the seat

belt with release button?, see "Releasing

seat belts" (Y page 46).

Belt height adjustment

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

You can adjust the seat belt height on the

front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that

allows the upper part of the seat belt to be

routed across the center of your shoulder.

X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in various

positions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide

release:.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.

X Release belt sash guide release: and

make sure that the belt sash guide has

engaged.

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue

will be trapped in the door or in the seat

mechanism. This could damage the door,

the door trim panel and the seat belt.

Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill

their protective function and must be

replaced. Visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

X Press release button? on belt buckle=.

X Guide belt tongue; to belt sash

guide:.

Belt warning for the driver and front

passenger

Regardless of whether the driver's and front-

passenger seat belts have already been

fastened, the7 seat belt warning lamp

lights up for six seconds each time the engine

is started. It then goes out if the driver and

the front passenger have fastened their seat

belts.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when

the engine is started, an additional warning

tone will sound. The warning tone goes out

after approximately six seconds or once the

driver's seat belt is fastened.

If after six seconds the driver or front

passenger have not fastened their seat belts

and the doors are closed, the7 seat belt

warning lamp lights up:

Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat

belt is fastened

Ronce the vehicle has exceeded a speed of

15 mph (25 km/h), in addition a warning

tone will sound with increasing intensity for

up to 60 seconds or until the driver's or

front-passenger seat belt is fastened.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten their

seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the

7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a

warning tone sounds again.

The warning tone ceases even if the driver or

front-passenger seat belt has still not been

fastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat belt

warning lamp stops flashing but remains

illuminated.

After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the

warning tone is reactivated and the7 seat

belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle

speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

The7 seat belt warning lamp only goes

out if:

Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.

or

Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.


i For more information on the7 seat

belt warning lamp, see "Warning and

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,

seat belts" (Y page 218).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt

force limiters

G WARNING

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices

that have been deployed must be renewed.

For your safety, when disposing of Emergency

Tensioning Devices, always observe the

safety instructions. These are available from

any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically

operated reversible pre-tensioners that do

not require replacement after activation.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belt

tongue in the buckle on the front-

passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency

Tensioning Device could be triggered in the


The front seat belts and the outer seat belts

in the rear are equipped with Emergency

Tensioning Devices and belt force limiters.

The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,

pulling them close against the body.

The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat

positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.

The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back

towards the backrest.

If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat

belt force limiter and this is triggered, the

force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle

occupant is reduced.

The belt force limiters for the front seats are

synchronized with the front air bags, which

take on a part of the deceleration force. This

results in the force exerted on the occupant

being distributed over a greater area.

The ETDs can only be activated when:

Rthe ignition is switched on.

Rthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 37).

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on

each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear

compartment are triggered independently of

the lock status of the seat belts.

The ETDs are triggered depending on the type

and severity of an accident:

Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, the vehicle decelerates or

accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal

direction during the initial stages of the

impact

Rif, in the event of a side impact, the vehicle

is subjected to high lateral acceleration/

deceleration

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,

and a small amount of powder may also be

released. Only in rare cases will the bang

affect your hearing. The powder that is

released generally does not constitute a

health hazard. The6 SRS warning lamp

lights up.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems


G WARNING


safer when properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front seating

position. Thus, we strongly recommend that

children be placed in the rear seats whenever

possible. Regardless of seating position,

children 12 years old and under must be

seated and properly secured in an appropriate

infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster

seat recommended for the size and weight of

the child.

Children in the vehicle 47

Safety

Z

The infant or child restraint must be properly

secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat

belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and

top tether strap, fully in accordance with the

child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Occupants, especially children, should always

sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt

properly and use an appropriately sized infant

restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat


child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by

an inflating air bag. Note the following

important information when circumstances

require you to place a child in the front

passenger seat:

RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate the front

passenger front air bag in your vehicle

when the system senses the weight of a

typical 12-month-old child or less along

with the weight of a standard appropriate

child restraint on the front passenger seat.

RFor children larger than the typical

12-month-old child, the front passenger

front air bag may or may not be activated.

Always make sure the45 indicator

lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front

passenger front air bag is deactivated.

RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriously

injured or even killed if the front passenger

front air bag inflates in a collision which

could occur under some circumstances,

even with the air bag technology installed

in your vehicle. The only means to

completely eliminate this risk is to never

place a child in a rear-facing child restraint

in the front seat. We therefore strongly

recommend that you always place a child

in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.

RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seat

because circumstances require you to do

so, make sure the45 indicator

lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front

passenger front air bag is deactivated.

Should the45 indicator lamp not

illuminate or go out while the restraint is

installed, please check installation.

Periodically check the45 indicator

lamp while driving to make sure the4

5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the

45 indicator lamp goes out or

remains out, do not transport a child on the

front passenger seat until the system has

been repaired.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriously

injured or even killed if the front passenger

front air bag inflates.

RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passenger

seat, move the seat as far back as possible,

use the proper child restraint

recommended for the age, size and weight

of the child, and secure child restraint with

the vehicle's seat belt according to the

child seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNING

Infants and small children should never share

a seat belt with another occupant. In the event

of an accident, they could be crushed

between the occupant and seat belt.





restraint.

Children that are too large for a child restraint

must travel in seats using normal seat belts.

Position the shoulder belt across the chest

and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat

may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt

positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until

they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt

fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove

it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat

belt to prevent the child restraint from

48 Children in the vehicleSafety

becoming a projectile in the event of an

accident.

G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take

the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle, even if they are secured in a child

restraint system, or with access to an

unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised

access to a vehicle could result in an accident

and/or serious personal injury. The children

could:

Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle

Rbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold

Rinjure themselves or cause an accidentwith

vehicle equipment that can be operated

even if the SmartKey is removed from the

ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,

such as seat adjustment, steering wheel

adjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure other

persons or get out of the vehicle and injure

themselves or be injured by following traffic.

Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight. The child restraint system's

metal parts, for example, could become very

hot, and the child could be burned on these

parts.

G WARNING

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the

passenger compartment or trunk unless they

are firmly secured in place.

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo

increases a child's risk of injury in the event

of

Rstrong braking maneuvers

Rsudden changes of direction

Ran accident

We recommend that all infants and children

be properly secured in an infant or child

restraint system at all times while the vehicle

is in motion.

The use of seat belts and infant and child

restraint systems is required by law in all 50

states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.

territories and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and childrenmust always be seated in

an appropriate infant or child restraint system


child. The infant or child restraint system

must be properly secured in accordance with

the manufacturer's instructions. All infant or

child restraint systems must meet Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and

210.2.

An information label on the child restraint

system indicates whether it meets these

standards. This information is also provided

in the installation instructions supplied with

the child restraint system.

Always read and follow the manufacturer's

instructions when using an infant or child

restraint system or booster seat.

Observe all warning signs in the vehicle

interior and on the infant or child restraint.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:

X Secure the infant or child with an

appropriate infant or child restraint

recommended for the child's age and

weight.

X Make sure that the infant or child is

properly secured at all times while the

vehicle is in motion.

Child seat on the front-passenger seat

G WARNING

If the front-passenger air bag is not disabled:

Ra child secured in a child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat could be

seriously or even fatally injured by the front-

passenger air bag deploying. This is

especially a risk if the child is in the


Safety

Z

immediate vicinity of the front-passenger

air bag when it deploys.

Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger

seat in a rearward-facing child restraint

system. Only secure a rearward-facing

child restraint system on a suitable rear

seat.

Ralways move the front-passenger seat to

the rearmost position if you secure a child

in a forward-facing child restraint system

on the front-passenger seat.

The front-passenger air bag is not disabled:

Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat.

Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat, unless

a child restraint system with transponders

for an air bag deactivation system is

installed on the front-passenger seat

Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat, if the

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

4 is not lit.

To make you aware of this danger, a

corresponding warning sticker has been

affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of

the sun visor on the front-passenger side.

Information about recommended child

restraint systems is available at any


Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor

Warning symbol for a rearward-facing childrestraint system

Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint

system on a seat that is protected by an air

bag installed in front of it.

Air bag deactivation system on the

front-passenger seat

G WARNING

If the4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

indicator lamp does not light up when the

child restraint system is installed, the front-

passenger air bag has not been disabled. If

the front-passenger air bag deploys, the child

could be seriously or even fatally injured.

Proceed as follows:

Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat.

Rinstall a rearward-facing child restraint

system on a suitable rear seat.

or

Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat and

move the front-passenger seat to the

rearmost position.

Rhave the air bag deactivation system

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

To ensure that the air bag deactivation system

on the front-passenger seat functions/

communicates correctly, never place objects,

e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint

system. The entire base of the child restraint

system must always rest on the seat cushion.

An incorrectly installed child restraint system


cannot perform its intended protective

function in the event of an accident, and could

lead to injuries.

G WARNING

Do not place electronic devices on the front-

passenger seat, e.g.:

Rlaptops, when switched on

Rmobile phones

Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or

access cards

Signals from electronic equipment can cause

interference in the sensor system of the air

bag deactivation system. This can lead to a

system malfunction. This may cause the

4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator

lamp to light up even if no child seat with a

transponder for an air bag deactivation

system is installed. The front-passenger air

bagwould not then deploy during an accident.

It is also possible that the6 SRS warning

lamp lights up and/or the4 PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up

briefly when you turn the key in the ignition

lock to position 2.

The sensor system of the air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat detects

whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat

has been installed there. To support

detection by the sensor system, the

Mercedes-Benz child seat is equipped with

transponders for the air bag deactivation

system. In this case, the45:

indicator lamp lights up. The front-passenger

air bag is deactivated.

i If the front-passenger air bag is

deactivated by the air bag deactivation

system, the following remain enabled on

the front-passenger side:

Rthe side impact air bag

Rthe window curtain air bag

Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

in the rear

G WARNING

Children that are too large for a child restraint

must travel in seats using normal seat belts.

Position the shoulder belt across the chest

and shoulder, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve

proper seat belt positioning for children over

41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where

a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a

booster.

Install the child restraint system in

accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

Attach the child restraint system to both

securing rings.

An incorrectly installed child restraint system

could come loose during an accident and

seriously or even fatally injure the child.

Child restraint systems or child seat securing

rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as

the result of a collision must be replaced.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middle

seat does not get trapped. The seat belt

could otherwise be damaged.


Safety

Z

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for

specially designed child restraint systems on

the rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings: for

two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

systems are installed on the left and right of

the rear seats.

Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt

system. Always install child restraint systems

according to themanufacturer's instructions.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system. Comply with the

manufacturer's instructions when

installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system.

Top Tether

G WARNING

If the red display is visible when the rear seat

backrest is upright, it means the rear seat

backrest is not engaged correctly.

Always engage the rear seat backrests in an

upright position if there are passengers in the

rear compartment. Engage the rear seat

backrests in an upright position after you have

installed the Top Tether belt or if the extended

cargo compartment is not being used. Push

and pull the rear seat backrests to check

whether they are engaged correctly. The rear

seat backrest may fold down if it is not

engaged correctly. The child restraint system

is then no longer supported correctly or held

in position and can no longer perform its

intended function. This can cause serious or

even fatal injuries.

Top Tether provides an additional connection

between a child restraint system, secured

with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,

and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk

of injury even further.

The Top Tether anchorages are located on the

rear side of the rear seat backrests.

X Move head restraint: upwards.

X Release rear seat backrest= and fold it

forwards (Y page 234).

X Route Top Tether beltB under head

restraint:between the twohead restraint

bars.

X Hook Top Tether hookA of Top Tether belt

B into Top Tether anchorage?.

Ensure that:

RTop Tether hookA is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage? as shown.

RTop Tether beltB is not twisted.

RTop Tether beltB is routed between rear

seat backrest= and cargo

compartment cover; if cargo

compartment cover; is installed.


X Swing back rear seat backrest= until it

engages.

The red lock verification indicator is no

longer visible.

X Move head restraint: back down again

slightly if necessary (Y page 87). Make

sure that you do not interfere with the

correct routing of Top Tether beltB.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system with Top Tether. Comply

with the manufacturer's installation

instructions when doing so. Make sure that

Top Tether beltB is tight.


Safety

Z

Problems with the air bag deactivation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The45indicator lamp on the

center console is lit.

A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with transponders for an air

bag deactivation systemhas been installed on the front-passenger

seat. The front-passenger air bag has therefore been deactivated

as desired.

G WARNING

There is no child seat installed on the front-passenger seat. The

air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.

It is also possible that the6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/

or the45 indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you

switch the ignition on.

There is a risk of injury.

X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,

e.g.

RLaptop

RMobile phone

RCards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards

If the45 indicator lamp remains lit:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems

Key to the letters used in the table:

X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.

U Suitable for child restraint systems in the Universal category that are approved for use in

this weight category.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category

and are approved for use in this weight category.

L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of

"Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 56).


Seat positions

Weight

categories

Front-passenger seat Rear seat

The front-

passenger air

bag is not

deactivated

The front-

passenger air

bag is

disabled1

Left, right Center

Category 0: up

to 10 kg

X U2, L2 U, L U, L

Category 0+:

up to 13 kg

X U2, L2 U, L U, L

Category I: 9 to

18 kg

U2, L2 U2, L2 U, L U, L

Category II: 15

to 25 kg

U2, L2 U2, L2 U, L U, L

Category III:

22 to 36 kg

U2, L2 U2, L2 U, L U, L

"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognized by their orange approval label.

Example: approval label on the child restraint system

Key to the letters used in the table:

X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems in

this weight category and/or size category.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems that belong to

the "Universal" category which are approved for use in this weight category.

IL Suitable for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems as recommended; see the

following table of "Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 56).

1 Vehicles with an air bag deactivation system in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the

"Universal" category with a transponder for the air bag deactivation system must be installed. The

45 indicator lamp must light up.2 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position, the backrest to an almost vertical

position, and the belt height adjustment to the lowest position.


Safety

Z

Suitability of the rear seats for attaching LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and

right

Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X

G ISO/L2 X

0: up to 10 kg

up to approximately

6 months

E ISO/R1 IL

0+: up to 13 kg

up to approximately

15 months

E ISO/R1 IL

D ISO/R2 IL

C ISO/R3 IL

I: 9to 18 kg

between

approximately

9 months and 4 years

D ISO/R2 IL

C ISO/R3 IL

B ISO/F2 IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF

A ISO/F3 IUF

Recommended child restraint systems

When installing a child restraint system without a transponder for the air bag deactivation

system on the front-passenger seat:

X Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.

Weight

categories

Manufact

urer

Type Approval

number

(E1 ...)

Order

number

(A 000 ...)

Air bag

deactivation

system

Category 0: up

to 10 kg

up to

approximately

6 months

Britax

Römer

BABY

SAFE

PLUS

03 301146

04 301146

970 10 00 Yes

Category 0+:

up to 13 kg

up to

approximately

15 months

Britax

Römer

BABY

SAFE

PLUS

03 301146

04 301146

970 10 00 Yes

Category I: 9 to

18 kg

Britax

Römer

DUO

PLUS

03 301133

04 301133

970 11 00 Yes


Weight

categories

Manufact

urer

Type Approval

number

(E1 ...)

Order

number

(A 000 ...)

Air bag

deactivation

system

between

approximately

9 months and

4 years

970 16 00 No

Category II/III:

15 to 36 kg

between

approximately

4and 12 years

Britax

Römer

KIDFIX 04 301198 970 18 00 Yes

970 19 00 No

Suggested LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system from the Universal/Semi-Universal

category

Weight

categorie

s

Size

category

Manufact

urer

Type Approval

number

(E1 ...)

Order

number

Air bag

deactivati

on system

Carry-cot F – – – – –

G – – – – –

Group 0:

up to

10 kg

E – – – – –

Group 0+:

up to

13 kg

E Britax

Römer

BABY SAFE

ISOFIX

PLUS

04 301146 B6 6 86

8224

No

D – – – – –

C – – – – –

Group I:

9to 18 kg

D – – – – –

C – – – – –

B – – – – –

B1 Britax

Römer

DUO PLUS 04 301133 A 000 970

11 00

Yes

A 000 970

16 00

No

A – – – – –


Safety

Z

Child-proof locks


G WARNING




Do not leave children unattended in the



unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised



could:







ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,

such as seat adjustment, steering wheel

adjustment, or the memory function







hot, and the child could be burned on these

parts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNING

Children could open a rear door from inside

the vehicle. This could result in serious

injuries or an accident. Therefore, when

children ride in the rear always secure the rear

doors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with the

child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door

secured with a child-proof lock cannot be

opened from inside the vehicle. When the

vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened

from the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof lock

lever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks are

working properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock

lever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side

windows

G WARNING

When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,

activate the override switch. Otherwise, the

children could be injured, e.g. by trapping

themselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button:.

If the indicator lamp is lit, operation of the

rear side windows is deactivated.


Operation is only possible using the

switches in the driver's door. If the

indicator lamp is off, operation is possible

using the switches in the rear

compartment.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overview

In this section, you will find information about

the following driving safety systems:

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

RBAS (Brake Assist System)

RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (adaptive

Brake Assist and distance warning signal)

RAdaptive brake lamps

RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64)

RSTEER CONTROL


If you fail to adapt your driving style or

become distracted, the driving safety

systems can neither reduce the risk of

accident nor override the laws of physics.

Driving safety systems are merely aids

designed to assist driving. You are

responsible for the distance to the vehicle in

front, for vehicle speed and for braking in

good time. Always adapt your driving style to

suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic

conditions and maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there

is adequate contact between the tires and

the road surface. Pay particular attention

to the information regarding tires,

recommended minimum tire tread depths

etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section

(Y page 292).

In wintry driving conditions, always use

winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,

snow chains. Only in this way will the

driving safety systems described in this

section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)


i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

G WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when

braking. The steerability and braking

characteristics may be severely impaired.

Additionally, further driving safety systems

are deactivated. There is an increased danger

of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked

immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,

including driving safety systems, will also

become inoperative. Observe the information

on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 220) and

display messages which may be shown in the

instrument cluster (Y page 194).

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way

that the wheels do not lock when you brake.

This allows you to continue steering the

vehicle when braking.

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph

(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface

conditions. ABS works on slippery roads,

even if you only brake gently.

The yellow! ABS warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up when the ignition

is switched on. It goes out when the engine is

running.

Driving safety systems 59

Safety

Z

Braking

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal vigorously until the braking

situation is over.

X To make a full brake application:

depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel

a pulsing in the brake pedal.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an

indication of hazardous road conditions, and

functions as a reminder to take extra care

while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)


G WARNING

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance

in an emergency braking situation is

increased. There is a risk of an accident.

In an emergency braking situation, depress

the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents

the wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency braking

situations. If you depress the brake pedal

quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking

force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

The brakes will function as usual once you

release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notes

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of

the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance

warning function, which are described in the

following.

Distance warning function



G WARNING

The distance warning function does not react:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncoming vehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rwhen cornering

Thus, the distance warning function cannot

provide a warning in all critical situations.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic

situation and be ready to brake.

The distance warning function cannot always

clearly identify objects and complex traffic

situations.

In such cases, the distance warning function

may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning

Rnot give a warning


situation and do not rely solely on the

distance warning function.

Function

X To activate/deactivate: activate or

deactivate the distance warning function in

the on-board computer (Y page 188).

When the distance warning function is

activated, the multifunction display shows

theÄ symbol, as long as the HOLD

function is not switched on (Y page 160). On

vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the

Ä symbol is displayed when transmission

position P is selected or if you drive faster

than 22 mph (35 km/h).

The distance warning function can help you

to minimize the risk of a front-end collision

with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of

such a collision. If the distance warning

60 Driving safety systemsSafety

function detects that there is a risk of a

collision, you will be warned visually and

acoustically. The distance warning function

cannot prevent a collision without your

intervention.

At speeds of approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or more, the distance warning

function warns you if you are rapidly

approaching the vehicle in front. An

intermittent warning tone will then sound and

the· distance warning lamp will light up

in the instrument cluster.

X Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.

or

X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to

do so.

For the distance warning function to assist

you when driving, the function must be

activated in the on-board computer

(Y page 188) and be operational.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly

complicated driving conditionsmay cause the

system to display unnecessary warnings.

With the help of the radar sensor system, the

distance warning function can detect

obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle

for an extended period of time.

At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), the

distance warning function may also detect

stationary obstacles such as stopped or

parked vehicles.

If you approach an obstacle and the distance

warning function detects a risk of a collision,

the system will initially alert you both visually

and acoustically.

In particular, the detection of obstacles can

be impaired if there is:

Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors

Rsnow or heavy rain

Rinterference by other radar sources

Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,

for example in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbike

Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of the

vehicle, have the configuration and operation

of the radar sensor checked at a qualified

specialist workshop. This also applies to

collisions at low speeds where there is no

visible damage to the front of the vehicle.


i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".

The radar sensor is intended for use in an

automotive radar system only. Removing,

altering or tampering with the device will

void any warranties, and is not permitted

by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or

use the device in any non-approved way.




i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:


and



cause undesired operation of the device.

Removal, tampering, or altering of the

device will void any warranties, and is not

permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use

the device in any non-approved way.




Adaptive Brake Assist



Safety

Z

G WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly

identify objects and complex traffic

situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake

Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an

accident.



G WARNING

Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:

Rto people or animals

Rto oncoming vehicles

Rto crossing traffic

Rto stationary obstacles

Rwhen cornering

As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not

intervene in all critical conditions. There is a




Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking

assistance in hazardous situations at speeds

greater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and uses

radar sensor technology to assess the traffic

situation.

With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the

distance warning signal can detect obstacles

that are in the path of your vehicle for an

extended period of time.

Should you approach an obstacle and

Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of

collision, Adaptive BrakeAssist calculates the

braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end

collision. Should you apply the brakes

vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will

automatically increase the braking force to a

level suitable for the traffic conditions.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

emergency braking situation is over.

ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:

Ryou release the brake pedal.

Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.

Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph

(250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable

of reacting to moving objects that have

already been recognized as such at least once

over the period of observation. Adaptive

Brake Assist does not react to stationary

obstacles.

If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due

to a malfunction in the radar sensor system,

the brake system remains available with full

brake boosting effect and BAS.





Rsnow or heavy rain


Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,

for example in parking garages


motorbike

Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line

relative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of the

vehicle, have the configuration and operation

of the radar sensor checked at a qualified

specialist workshop. This also applies to

collisions at low speeds where there is no

visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

i This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar

sensor is intended for use in an automotive

radar system only. Removing, altering or

tampering with the device will void any

warranties, and is not permitted by the

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use the

device in any non-approved way.





Adaptive brake lamps

If you brake sharply from a speed of more

than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS

or Adaptive Brake Assist, the brake lamps

flash rapidly. In this way, traffic traveling

behind you is warned in an even more

noticeable manner.

If you brake sharply to a standstill from a

speed of more than 70 km/h, the hazard

warning lamps are activated automatically. If

the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps

light up continuously. The hazard warning

lamps switch off automatically if you travel

faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off

the hazard warning lamps using the hazard

warning button (Y page 99).

i Adaptive brake lamps are only available incertain countries.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)



G WARNING

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to

stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further

driving safety systems are deactivated. This

increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a


! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off the

ignition. Application of the brakes by

ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake

system.

When towing your vehicle with the front axle

raised, pay attention to the notes about

ESP®(Y page 286).

ESP® is deactivated if theå warning lamp

in the instrument cluster lights up

continuously when the engine is running.

If the÷ warning lamp and theå

warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not

available due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps

(Y page 222) and display messages which

may be shown in the instrument cluster

(Y page 194).

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating

from the direction desired by the driver, one

or more wheels are braked to stabilize the

vehicle. The engine output is also modified to

keep the vehicle on the desired course within

physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when

pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®

can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP® warning

lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

If ESP® intervenes:

X Do not deactivate ESP® under any

circumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far

as necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the

prevailing road and weather conditions.

i Only use wheels with the recommended

tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function

properly.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)


Traction control is part of ESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels

individually if they spin. This enables you to

pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,

for example if the road surface is slippery on

one side.


Safety

Z

Traction control remains active if you

deactivate ESP®.

Deactivating/activating ESP®


G WARNING

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer

stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased

risk of skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations

described in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP® deactivated.

You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

ESP® is activated automatically when the

engine is started.

If ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheels

start to spin, the÷ ESP® warning lamp in

the instrument cluster flashes. In such

situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.

X To deactivate:(Y page 187).

Theå ESP® OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: (Y page 187).

Theå ESP® OFF warning lamp in the

instrument cluster goes out.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the

following situations:

Rwhen using snow chains

Rin deep snow

Ron sand or gravel

If you deactivate ESP®:

RESP® no longer improves driving stability.

Rtraction control is still activated.

RESP® still provides support when you

brake.

Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of

thewheels results in a cutting action, which

provides better grip.

EBD (electronic brake force

distribution)


G WARNING

If EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels can

still lock, e.g. under full braking. This

increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

to the different handling characteristics. Have

the brake system checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and

warning lamps (Y page 220) as well as

display messages (Y page 196).

EBD monitors and controls the brake

pressure on the rear wheels to improve

driving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKE

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety

and offers increased braking comfort. In

addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE

BRAKE also has the HOLD function

(Y page 160) and hill start assist

(Y page 128). For further information, see

Driving tips (Y page 146).

STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a

noticeable steering force to the steering

wheel in the direction required for vehicle

stabilization.

This steering assistance is provided in

particular if:

Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on

a wet or slippery road surface when you

brake

Rthe vehicle starts to skid

If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive

steering support from STEER CONTROL.


Power steering will, however, continue to

function.

Theft deterrent locking system

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from

being started without the correct SmartKey.

X To activate: remove the SmartKey from

the ignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The

engine can be started by anyone with a valid

SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be

started when the starter battery is fully

charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.


Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

In the event that the engine cannot be

started when the starter battery is fully

charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.


Center or call 1-800-387-0100.

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:

Ra door

Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key

Rthe tailgate

Rthe hood

The alarm is not switched off, even if you

close the open door that has triggered it, for

example.

i If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, the Tele Aid system

automatically initiates a call to the

Customer Assistance center. The Tele Aid

system will initiate the call provided that:

Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

service.

Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated

properly.

Rthe requiredmobile phone, power supply

and GPS are available.

Activating

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm

system is armed after approximately

15 seconds.

Deactivating

X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

or


Turning off the alarm


The alarm turns off.

or

X Press the% or& button on the

SmartKey.

The alarm turns off.

Theft deterrent locking system 65

Safety

Z

Interior motion sensor

Function

When the interior motion sensor is armed, a

visual and audible alarm is triggered if

movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

This occurs if someone reaches into the

vehicle interior, for example.

Activating

X Make sure that:

Rthe side windows are closed.

Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel is closed.

This will prevent false alarms.

X Make sure that the doors and tailgate are

closed.

Only then is the interior motion sensor

armed.


The interior motion sensor is armed after

approximately 30 seconds.

Deactivating

X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

or


The interior motion sensor is disarmed

automatically.

Deactivating

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.

X Press button:.

Indicator lamp; flashes briefly.


The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

The interior motion sensor remains

deactivated until:

Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.

Ra door is opened and closed again.

Rthe vehicle is locked again.

To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the

interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle

and:

Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.

Rthe side windows remain open.

Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel remains open.

66 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety


SmartKey ............................................. 68

Doors .................................................... 73

Cargo compartment ............................ 76

Side windows ...................................... 77

Sliding sunroof .................................... 80

67

Opening/closing

Useful information










SmartKey


G WARNING




Do not leave children unsupervised in the


restraint system, and do not give them access

to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised


and/or serious personal injury. They could:

Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts

Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or cold

Rinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be in

operation even after the SmartKey has

been removed from the ignition, such as the

seat adjustment, steering wheel

adjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could cause

severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if

they get out of the vehicle, they could injure

themselves when doing so or be seriously or

even fatally injured by any passing traffic.




hot, and a child could be burned on these

parts.

G WARNING

Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to

the key that is inserted in the ignition. If a key

ring is too heavy or too large, theweight acting

on the key could cause it to turn in the ignition

lock or catch on the steeringwheel. This could

cause the engine to be switched off suddenly.

You could lose control of the vehicle and

cause an accident.

Keep the SmartKey away from strong

magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote

control function could be affected.

Do not keep the SmartKey:

Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile

phone or another SmartKey

Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal

foil

Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

SmartKey functions

:& To lock the vehicle

;% To unlock the vehicle

X To unlock centrally: press the%button.

If you do not open the vehicle within

approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:

Rthe vehicle is locked again.

Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed

again.

68 SmartKeyOpening/closing

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:

Rthe doors

Rthe tailgate

Rthe fuel filler flap

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.

When locking, they flash three times.

When it is dark, the surround lighting also

comes on if it is activated in the on-board

computer (Y page 190).

You can also set an audible signal to confirm

that the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated and deactivated using

the on-board computer (Y page 191).

Changing the settings of the locking

system

You can change the settings of the locking

system. When you then unlock the vehicle

only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap

are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently

travel on your own.

X To change the setting: press and hold

down the% and& buttons

simultaneously for approximately six

seconds until the battery check lamp

(Y page 70) flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system is

changed within the signal range of the

vehicle, pressing the& or% button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:

X To unlock the driver's door: press the

% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

X To restore the factory settings: press

and hold down the% and& buttons

simultaneously for approximately six

seconds until the battery check lamp

flashes twice (Y page 70).

Mechanical key

General notes

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with

the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm

system will be triggered (Y page 65).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:

X Press the% or& button on the

SmartKey.

or


If you unlock the vehicle using themechanical

key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked

automatically.

X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of

the arrow and at the same time remove

mechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey 69

Opening/closing

Z

SmartKey battery


G WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and caustic

substances. For this reason, keep batteries

out of the reach of children.

If a battery has been swallowed, seek medical

help immediately.

G WARNING

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling

and regard for the environment. Observe

government disposal guidelines. California

residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/

HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/

index.cfm.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.

The battery is working properly if battery

check lamp: lights up briefly.

The battery is discharged if battery check

lamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 70).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked within

the signal reception range of the vehicle,

pressing the& or% button:

Rlocks or

Runlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery in any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the battery

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 69).

X Press mechanical key; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of the

arrow until battery tray cover: opens.

When doing so, do not hold cover: shut.

X Remove battery tray cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free

cloth to do so.


X Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free from lint, grease and all other forms of

contamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery tray

cover: and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons

on the vehicle.

SmartKey 71

Opening/closing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey


You cannot lock or

unlock the vehicle

using the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the

driver's door handle from close range and press the% or

& button.

If this does not work:

X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary

(Y page 70).

X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the

driver's door handle from close range and press the% /

& button.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Unlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the

mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a

SmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

workshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the

mechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.

X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.


Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot be

started using the

SmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.

X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

(Y page 279).

or

X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 283).

or

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be

started using the

SmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.While

doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

Doors


G WARNING












heat or cold
















parts.

G WARNING


passenger compartment or cargo

compartment unless they are firmly secured

in place.



of



Ran accident

Doors 73

Opening/closing

Z

Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside

X Pull door handle;.

If the door is locked, locking knob: pops

up. The door is unlocked and can be

opened.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle

even if it has been locked. You can open the

rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they

are secured by the child-proof lock

(Y page 58).

If the vehicle has previously been locked with

the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside

will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).

Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle

from the inside. This can be useful if you wish

to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for

example.

X To unlock: press button:.

X To lock: press button;.

If all the doors and the tailgate are closed,

the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be

locked or unlocked.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from

the inside if the vehicle has been locked with

the SmartKey.

You can open a door from inside the vehicle

even if it has been locked. You can open the

rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they

are secured by the child-proof lock

(Y page 58).

If the vehicle has previously been locked with

the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside

will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).

If the vehicle has been locked using the

locking button for the central locking, or has

been locked automatically, and a door is

opened from the inside:

Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had

previously been fully unlocked

Ronly the door which has been opened form

the inside is unlocked if only the driver's

door had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:

for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; for

about five seconds until a tone sounds.

74 DoorsOpening/closing

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting has

already been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when the

ignition is switched on and the wheels are

turning.

You could therefore lock yourself out if:

Rthe vehicle is being pushed.

Rthe vehicle is being towed.

Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

You can also switch the automatic locking

function on and off using the on-board

computer (Y page 191).

Unlocking the driver's door

(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with

the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and

open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm

system will be triggered (Y page 65).



X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwise

to position1.

The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove

it.


SmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the

SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X Open the driver's door.

X Close the front-passenger door, the rear

doors and the tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 74).

X Check whether the locking knobs on the

front-passenger door and the rear doors

are still visible. Press down the locking

knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 74).

X Close the driver's door.



X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far

as it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and remove

it.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate

are locked.


SmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-

theft alarm system is not armed.

Doors 75

Opening/closing

Z

Cargo compartment


G WARNING












heat or cold
















parts.

G WARNING


passenger compartment or cargo

compartment unless they are firmly secured

in place.



of



Ran accident

G WARNING

Make sure the tailgate is closed when the

engine is running and while driving. Among

other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)

gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in

unconsciousness and death.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make sure

that there is sufficient clearance above and

behind the tailgate.

i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Y page 329).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo

compartment. You could otherwise lock

yourself out.

The tailgate can be:

Ropened and closed manually from outside

Runlocked from inside with the mechanical

key

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle:.

X Raise the tailgate.

76 Cargo compartmentOpening/closing

Closing

G WARNING

To prevent possible personal injury, always

keep hands and fingers away from the cargo

compartment opening when closing the

tailgate. Be especially careful when small

children are around.

X Pull the tailgate down using handle:.

X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the

& button on the SmartKey.

Tailgate emergency release

If the tailgate can no longer be opened from

outside the vehicle, use the emergency

release on the inside of the tailgate.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make sure

that there is sufficient clearance above and

behind the tailgate.

i The opening dimensions of the tailgatecan be found in the "Vehicle data" section

(Y page 329).



X Insert mechanical key; into the opening

in paneling:.

X Turn mechanical key; 90° clockwise.

X Push mechanical key; in the direction of

the arrow and open the tailgate.

Side windows


G WARNING

When opening and closing the side windows,

make sure that nobody can be injured by the

opening or closing procedure.

The side windows are equipped with

automatic operation and the anti-entrapment

feature. If in automatic operation a side

window encounters an obstruction that

blocks its path, the anti-entrapment feature

will stop the side window and reopen it

slightly.

The side windows operate differently when

the switch is pulled. Details can be found

under "Problems with the side windows" in

this section.

The closing of the side windows can be

immediately halted by releasing the switch or,

if the switch was pulled past the resistance

point and released, by either pressing or

pulling the respective switch.

If a side window encounters an obstruction

that blocks its path when you are closing the

side windows by pressing and holding the

Side windows 77

Opening/closing

Z

& button on the SmartKey, the anti-

entrapment feature will not operate.

Opening and closing the side

windows

The switches for all side windows are located

on the driver's door. There is also a switch on

each door for the corresponding sidewindow.

The switches on the driver's door take

precedence.

: Front left

; Front right

= Rear right

? Rear left

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 58), the side

windows cannot be operated from the rear.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.

X To close: pull the corresponding switch.

i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/

closing process is started in the

corresponding direction. You can stop

automatic operation by operating the

switch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine or

remove the SmartKey. This function is

available for up to five minutes or until the

driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience opening

You can ventilate the vehicle before you start

driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to

carry out the following functions

simultaneously:

Runlock the vehicle

Ropen the side windows

Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. The

SmartKey must be close to the driver's

door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.

X Press and hold the% button until the

side windows and the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired

position.

If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof

with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the

roller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again until

the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:

release the% button.

Convenience closing

G WARNING

When using the convenience closing feature,

make sure that nobody can become trapped.

Rrelease the& button.

Rpress and hold the% button until the

side windows and the panorama sliding

sunroof open again.

When you lock the vehicle, you can

simultaneously:

Rclose the side windows

Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel

78 Side windowsOpening/closing

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the

roller sunblinds.

i The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.

X Press and hold the& button until the

side windows and the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel:

X Press and hold the& button again until

the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof

with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:

release the& button.

Resetting the side windows

You must reset each side window if:

Rthe side window opens again slightly after

being closed fully.

Rthe side window can no longer be fully

opened or closed.

X Close all the doors.


ignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window is

completely closed (Y page 78).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the side

window is completely closed (Y page 78).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

X If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,

the side window has been reset correctly.

If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING

Closing the sidewindowswith increased force

or without the anti-entrapment feature could

lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure

that nobody can become trapped when

closing the side windows.

G WARNING

Pulling and holding the switch to close the

door window immediately after it had been

blocked two times will cause the door window

to close without the anti-entrapment feature

for as long as you hold the switch.

Problem: a side window cannot be closed

because it is blocked by objects, e.g.

leaves in the window guide.

X Remove the objects.

X Close the side window.

Problem: a side window cannot be closed

and you cannot see the cause. If a side

window is obstructed during closing and

reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until the

side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased

force.

If a side window is obstructed again during

closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until the

side window has closed.

The side window is closed without the anti-

entrapment feature.

Side windows 79

Opening/closing

Z

Sliding sunroof


In the following section, the term "sliding

sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNING

When opening or closing the sliding sunroof,

make sure that there is no danger of anyone

being harmed by the opening/closing

procedure.

The sliding sunroof is equipped with

automatic operation and the anti-entrapment

feature. If themovement of the sliding sunroof

is blocked during the closing procedure, the

sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.

The sliding sunroof operates differently when

the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.

See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof"

section for more details.

The opening/closing procedure of the sliding

sunroof can be immediately halted by

releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the

sliding sunroof switch was moved past the

resistance point and released, by moving the

sliding sunroof switch in any direction.

G WARNING

The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the

event of an accident, the glass may shatter.

This may result in an opening in the roof.

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing

their seat belts or not wearing them properly

may be thrown out of the opening. Such an

opening also presents a potential for injury for

occupants wearing their seat belts properly,

as entire body parts or portions of them may

protrude from the passenger compartment.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions

may occur.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the

sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could

be damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the

sliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave the

vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be

damaged if water enters the vehicle

interior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the sliding

sunroof is open. They are caused by minor

pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.

Change the position of the sliding sunroof

or open a side window slightly to reduce or

eliminate these noises.

Operating the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel


: To raise

; To open

= To close/lower


ignition lock.

X Make sure that the roller sunblinds are

open.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the

corresponding direction.

i If you press the3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/




switch again.

80 Sliding sunroofOpening/closing

The automatic raising feature is available

only when the panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel is closed.

i You can continue to operate thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel after switching off the engine or

removing the SmartKey. This function

remains active for five minutes or until you

open a front door.

Operating the roller sunblinds for the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel


G WARNING

When opening or closing the roller sunblinds,

make sure that no one can be injured.

The roller sunblinds have automatic operation

and an anti-entrapment feature. If the roller

sunblinds are blocked during the closing

procedure, the anti-entrapment feature stops

the roller sunblinds and they open again

slightly.

The opening and closing of the roller

sunblinds can be terminated immediately by

releasing the button. In automatic operation,

press the button briefly in any direction to

stop the roller sunblinds.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior

from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can

only be opened and closed together when the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

is closed.

Opening/closing


: To open

; To open

= To close


ignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the

corresponding direction.

i If you press the3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/




switch again.

Resetting the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel and the roller

sunblinds

! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds

cannot be fully opened or closed after

resetting, contact a qualified specialist

workshop.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding

panel or the front roller sunblinds do notmove

smoothly, reset the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel and the roller

sunblinds:


ignition lock.

X Press the3 switch to the point of

resistance in the direction of arrow; and

Sliding sunroof 81

Opening/closing

Z

hold it until the panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel has opened about

4 in(10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow=

until the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an

additional second.

X Press the3 switch to the point of

resistance in the direction of arrow; and

hold it until the roller sunblinds have

opened about 4 in(10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point

of resistance in the direction of arrow=

until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an

additional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 80) and the

roller sunblinds (Y page 81) can be fully

opened and closed again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

In the following section, the term "sliding

sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNING

You could be severely or even fatally injured

when closing the sliding sunroof with

increased closing force or if the anti-

entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure

that nobody can become trapped when

closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNING

Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof

switch to close the sliding sunroof

immediately after it had been blocked two

times will cause the sliding sunroof to close

without the anti-entrapment feature for as

long as you hold the switch.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of a

malfunction, contact a qualified specialist

workshop.

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed

and you cannot see the cause. If the sliding

sunroof is obstructed during closing and

reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the3 switch in the

overhead control panel down to the point

of resistance and hold it until the sliding

sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closedwith increased

force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again

during closing and reopens again slightly:

X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the3 switch in the

overhead control panel down to the point

of resistance and hold it until the sliding

sunroof is closed.

The sliding sunroof is closed without the

anti-entrapment feature.

82 Sliding sunroofOpening/closing


Correcting the driver's seat posi-

tion ....................................................... 84

Seats .................................................... 85

Steering wheel .................................... 89

Mirrors ................................................. 90

Memory functions ............................... 93

83

Seats,steeringwheelandmirrors

Useful information










Correcting the driver's seat position

Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 85).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted

properly.

Manual seat adjustment (Y page 86)

Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 87)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:

Ryou are as far away from the driver's air

bag as possible.

Ryou are sitting in a normal upright

position.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an

almost vertical position.

Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so

that your thighs are gently supported.

Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint is

adjusted properly (Y page 87).

When doing so, make sure that you have

adjusted the head restraint so that the back

of your head is supported at eye level by

the center of the head restraint.

Observe the safety guidelines on steering

wheel adjustment (Y page 89).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is

adjusted properly.

Adjusting the steering wheel

(Y page 89)

When adjusting the steering wheel, make

sure that:

Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with your

arms slightly bent.

Ryou can move your legs freely.

Ryou can see all the displays in the

instrument cluster clearly.

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

(Y page 43).

X Check whether you have fastened seat

belt; properly (Y page 45).

The seat belt should:

Rfit snugly across your body

Rbe routed across the middle of your

shoulder

Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the

hip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror and the exterior mirrors

(Y page 90) in such a way that you have

a good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: save

the seat and exterior mirror settings

(Y page 93).

84 Correcting the driver's seat positionSeats,steeringwheelandmirrors

Seats


G WARNING

The seats can still be adjusted when there is

no key in the ignition lock. For this reason,

children should never be left unsupervised in

the vehicle. They could otherwise become

trapped when adjusting the seat.

G WARNING

In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle

control, all seat, head restraint, steering

wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as

well as fastening of seat belts, must be done

before setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNING

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat

backrest in an excessively reclined position as

this can be dangerous. You could slide under

the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under

it, the seat belt would apply force at the

abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or

fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts

provide the best restraint when the wearer is

in a position that is as upright as possible and

seat belts are properly positioned on the

body.

G WARNING

Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you

can correctly fasten your seat belt.

Observe the following points:

Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are

slightly angled when holding the steering

wheel.

Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach the

accelerator/brake pedal safely. The

position should be as far back as possible

with the driver still able to operate the

controls properly.

Radjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible and the center

of the head restraint supports the back of

the head at eye level.

Rnever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is being

adjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accident

and/or serious personal injury.

G WARNING


safer when properly restrained on the rear

seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,

we strongly recommend that children be

placed in the rear seat whenever possible.

Regardless of seating position, children 12

years old and under must be seated and

properly secured in an appropriately sized

child restraint system or booster seat


child. For additional information, see the

"Children in the vehicle" section.





restraint.

G WARNING

Make sure that the back of your head is

supported at eye level by the central area of

the head restraint. If your head is not

supported correctly by the head restraint, you

could suffer a severe neck injury in the event

of an accident. Never drive if the head

restraints are not engaged and set correctly.

Seats 85


Z

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:

Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as

soon as possible.

Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seat

heating should also not be used to dry

the seats.

Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on the

seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.

The seats should only be occupied by

passengers, if possible.

Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulating

materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,

seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resetting

the seats. There is a risk that the seats

and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front and rearseats can be removed.

For more information, contact a qualified


i Further related subjects:

Rcargo compartment enlargement

(folding down rear seat) (Y page 234)

Adjusting the seats manually

Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

X Lift handle: and slide the seat forwards

or backwards.

X Release lever: again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage in

position.

Backrest angle

X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.

X Turn handwheel? forwards or backwards.

Seat height

X Pull handle= upwards or push it down

repeatedly until the seat has reached the

desired height.

Seat cushion angle

Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly

supported.

X Turn handwheel; forwards or backwards.

86 SeatsSeats,steeringwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seats electrically

: Head restraint height3

; Seat cushion angle

= Seat height

? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

A Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 93).

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in the

direction of the arrow and push the head

restraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of the

head restraint

With this function you can adjust the distance

between the head restraint and the back of

the seat occupant's head.

X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint

forwards in the direction of the arrow until

it engages.

There are several notches.

X To move backwards: press and hold

release button: and push the head

restraint backwards.

X When the head restraint is in the desired

position, release the button and make sure

that the head restraint is engaged in

position.

Adjusting the head restraints

electrically

X To adjust the head restraint height: slide

the switch for head restraint adjustment

(Y page 87) up or down in the direction of

the arrow.

Rear seat head restraints


G WARNING

For safety reasons, always drive with the rear

head restraints in the upright position when

the rear seats are occupied.

3 Not in vehicles with sports seats.

Seats 87


Z

Keep the area around head restraints clear of

articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the

folding operation of the head restraints.

G WARNING

For your protection, drive only with properly

positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it

is as close to the head as possible and the

center of the head restraint supports the back

of the head at eye level. This will reduce the

potential for injury to the head and neck in the

event of an accident or similar situation.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move

the respective head restraint up from the

lowest non-use position and have the

occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head

restraints installed when the rear seats are

occupied. Head restraints are intended to

help reduce injuries during an accident.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and push

the head restraint down until it is in the

desired position.

Removing and installing the rear seat

head restraints

G WARNING

Occupants should only travel sitting on seats

which have the head restraints installed. This

reduces the risk of injury to occupants in the


X Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in

order to remove the head restraint

(Y page 234).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to

the stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the head

restraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so

that the notches on the bar are on the left

when viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear

it engage in position.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seat

backrests individually to provide optimum

support for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour

; To soften the backrest contour

88 SeatsSeats,steeringwheelandmirrors

= To lower the backrest contour

? To harden the backrest contour

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

The three red indicator lamps in the button

indicate the heating level you have selected.

The system automatically switches down

from level 3 to level 2 after approximately

eight minutes.

The system automatically switches down

from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten

minutes.

The system automatically switches off

approximately 20 minutes after it is set to

level 1.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has switched off

prematurely or cannot be switched on. The

vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low

because too many electrical consumers are

switched on.

X Switch off electrical consumers that you do

not need, such as the rear window

defroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel


G WARNING

Only adjust the steering wheel with the

vehicle at a standstill and make sure the

steering wheel is securely locked in place

before driving off.

Driving without the steering wheel

adjustment locked may cause an unexpected

steering wheel movement which could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make

sure the steering wheel is securely locked by

trying to move it up and down, and in and out

before driving off.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: Release lever

; To adjust the steering wheel height

= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

Steering wheel 89


Z

X Push release lever: down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

X Push release lever: up completely.

The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.

When doing so, try to push the steering

wheel up or down or try to move it in the

fore-and-aft direction.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:

forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNING

The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the

image. Objects are actually closer than they

appear. You couldmisjudge the distance from

vehicles driving behind and cause an

accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this

reason, make sure of the actual distance from

the vehicle driving behind by glancing over

your shoulder.



X Press button: for the left-hand exterior

mirror or button; for the right-hand

exterior mirror.

The indicator lamp in the corresponding

button lights up in red.

The indicator lamp goes out again after

some time. You can adjust the selected

mirror using adjustment button= as long

as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or

to the left or right until you have adjusted

the exterior mirror to the correct position.

You should have a good overview of traffic

conditions.

The exterior mirrors are automatically heated

after starting the vehicle if the rear window

defroster is switched on and the outside

temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to

10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear window

defroster.

90 MirrorsSeats,steeringwheelandmirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically



X Briefly press button:.

Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. They

could otherwise vibrate.

Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or

completely discharged, the exterior mirrors

must be reset. The exterior mirrors will

otherwise not fold in when you select the

"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the

on-board computer (Y page 192).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 1 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically

If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function

is activated in the on-board computer

(Y page 192):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from the

outside.

Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again

automatically as soon as you unlock the

vehicle and then open the driver's or front-

passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

position, proceed as follows:

X Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors:move the exterior mirror

into the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding

exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-

folding button (Y page 91) until you hear a

click and then the mirrors engage in

position.

The mirror housing is engaged again and

you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual

(Y page 90).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING

If incident light from headlamps is prevented

from striking the sensor in the rear-view

mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high

in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-

glare function will not operate.

Incident light could then blind you. This may

distract you from the traffic conditions and,

as a result, you may cause an accident.

The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is

only available if the vehicle is equipped with

the "Mirrors package".

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror

on the driver's side automatically go into anti-

glare mode if:

Rthe ignition is switched on and

Rincident light from headlamps strikes the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if

reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting

is switched on.

Mirrors 91


Z

Parking position for the exterior

mirror on the front-passenger side

General notes

The "Parking position of the exterior mirror on

the front-passenger side" function is only

available if the vehicle is equipped with the

"Mirrors package".

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

You can position the front-passenger side

exterior mirror in such a way that you can see

the rear wheel on that side as soon as you

engage reverse gear. You can store this

position.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the

ignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on

the front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the

exterior mirror. You should see the rear

wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side returns to the driving

position.

Using the memory button

You can position the front-passenger side

exterior mirror in such a way that you can see

the rear wheel on that side as soon as you

engage reverse gear. You can store this

position. This setting can be stored using

memory button M?.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the

ignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on

the front-passenger side.



side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the

exterior mirror. You should see the rear

wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of the

arrows on adjustment button= within

three seconds.

The parking position is stored if the exterior

mirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat

the steps.

Calling up a stored parking position

setting

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side with the corresponding

button (Y page 90).



side moves to the stored parking position.


side moves back to its original position:

Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)

Rabout ten seconds after you have

disengaged reverse gear

Rif you press button: for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

92 MirrorsSeats,steeringwheelandmirrors

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNING

Only use the memory function on the driver's

side when the vehicle is stationary. You could

otherwise be distracted from the traffic

conditions by the seat moving of its own

accord, and as a result cause an accident.

With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings, e.g. for three

different people.

The following settings are stored as a single

memory preset:

Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraint

Rdriver's side: position of the exterior

mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger

sides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 87).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's

side (Y page 90).

X Briefly press the M memory button and

then press storage position button 1, 2 or

3 within three seconds.

The settings are stored in the selected

preset position. A tone sounds when the

settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant storage

position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and

exterior mirrors are in the stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage position

button.

Memory functions 93


Z


Exterior lighting .................................. 96

Interior lighting ................................. 101

Replacing bulbs ................................. 102

Windshield wipers ............................ 109

95

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information










Exterior lighting


For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you drive with the lights

switched on even during the daytime. In some

countries, operation of the headlamps varies

due to legal requirements and self-imposed

obligations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beam

Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low

beam in countries in which traffic drives on

the opposite side of the road from the country

where the vehicle is registered. This prevents

glare to oncoming traffic. When using

symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not

lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.

Have the headlamps converted at a qualified

specialist workshop as close to the border as

possible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beam

after returning

Have the headlamps converted back to

asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a

qualified specialist workshop as soon as

possible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options

Exterior lighting can be set using:

Rthe light switch

Rthe combination switch (Y page 98)

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 190)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps

2X Right-hand standing lamps

3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

BR Rear fog lamp

CN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)

If you hear a warning tone when you leave the

vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.

X Turn the light switch toÃ.

The exterior lighting (except the parking/

standing lamps) switches off automatically if

you:

Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey

in position 0.

96 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNING

If the light switch is set toÃ and it is foggy,

snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-

beam headlamps will not come on

automatically. This could endanger you and

others. In such situations turn the light switch

toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an

aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's

lighting at all times.

Ã is the favored light switch setting. The

light setting is automatically selected

according to the brightness of the ambient

light (exception: poor visibility due to weather

conditions such as fog, snow or spray):

RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:

the parking lamps are switched on or off

automatically depending on the brightness

of the ambient light.

RWith the engine running: if you have

activated the daytime running lamps

function via the on-board computer, the

daytime running lamps or the low-beam

headlamps and parking lamps are switched

on or off automatically depending on the

brightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp

mode: turn the light switch toÃ.

The daytime running lamps improve the

visibility of your vehicle during the day. The

daytime running lamps function is required by

law in Canada. It cannot therefore be

deactivated.

When the engine is running and the vehicle is

stationary: if youmove the selector lever from

a drive position to P, the daytime running

lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after

three minutes.

When the engine is running, the vehicle is

stationary and in high ambient light

brightness: if you turn the light switch

toT, you turn on the daytime running

lamps and parking lamps.

If the engine is running and you turn the light

switch toL, the manual settings take

precedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlamps

G WARNING

If the light switch is set toÃ and it is foggy,

snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-

beam headlamps will not come on

automatically. This could endanger you and

others. In such situations turn the light switch

toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an

aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's

lighting at all times.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that

is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam

headlamps switch on when the SmartKey is

inserted into the ignition lock and the light

switch is set to theL position. This is a

particularly useful function in the event of rain

and fog.

X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to

position 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch toL.

The greenL indicator lamp in the


Front fog lamps

In conditions where visibility is poor due to

fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve

visibility as well as making it easier for other

road users to see you. They can be operated

together with the parking lamps or together

with the parking lamps and low-beam

headlamps.

X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn

the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position

2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch toL orÃ.

Exterior lighting 97


Z

X Press theN button.

The greenN indicator lamp in the


X To switch off the front fog lamps: press

theN button.

The greenN indicator lamp in the


Only vehicles with front fog lamps are

equipped with the "fog lamp" function;

information on the fog lamp function for

vehicles with Intelligent Light System

(Y page 100).

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your

vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of

heavy fog. Please take note of the country-

specific regulations for the use of rear fog

lamps.

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2

or start the engine.


X Press theR button.

The yellowR indicator lamp in the


X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the

R button.

The yellowR indicator lamp in the


Parking lamps

! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standing

lamps are automatically switched off to

enable the next engine start. Always park

your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit

according to legal standards. Avoid the

continuous use of theT parking lamps

for several hours. If possible, switch on the

X right or theW left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn light switch toT.

The greenT indicator lamp in the


Standing lamps

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the

corresponding side of the vehicle is

illuminated.

X To switch on the standing lamps: the

SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is

in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side

of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side of

the vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signals

: High-beam headlamps

; Turn signal, right

= High-beam flasher

? Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in the

direction of arrow; or?.

The corresponding turn signal flashes three

times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch

beyond the pressure point in the direction

of arrow; or?.

High-beam headlamps

X To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to

position 2 or start the engine.



X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of

arrow:.

In theÃ position, the high-beam

headlamps are only switched on when it is

dark and the engine is running.

The blueK indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster lights up when the high-

beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam

headlamps:move the combination switch

back to its normal position.

The blueK indicator lamp in the


i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,

it controls activation of the high-beam

headlamps (Y page 100).

High-beam flasher

X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the

engine.

X Pull the combination switch in the direction

of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automatically

switch on if:

Ran air bag is deployed.

Rthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a

speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and

comes to a halt.

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:

press button:.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on

a turn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on the

corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning

lamps: press button:.

If the vehicle returns to a speed of over

6mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the

brakes, the hazard warning lamps are

deactivated automatically.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning system

The headlamps are cleaned automatically if

the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is

operated five timeswhile the lights are on and

the engine is running (Y page 109). When you

switch off the ignition, the automatic

headlamp cleaning system is reset and

counting is resumed from 0.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the

illumination of the road over a wide angle in

the direction you are turning, enabling better

visibility in tight bends, for example. The

cornering light function can only be activated

when the low-beam headlamps are switched

on.

Exterior lighting 99


Z

Active:

Rif you are driving at speeds below

25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn

signal or turn the steering wheel.

Rif you are driving at speeds between

25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h)

and turn the steering wheel

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above

25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn

signals or turn the steering wheel to the

straight-ahead position.

The cornering light function may remain lit for

a short time, but is automatically switched off

after no more than three minutes.

Extended range fog lamps

The extended range fog lamps reduce the

glare experienced by the driver and improve

the illumination of the edge of the road.

Active: if you are driving at speeds below

40mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear

fog lamp

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above

60 mph (100 km/h) or if you switch off the

rear fog lamp following activation

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

G WARNING

The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid

intended to support you while driving. The

driver is and remains responsible for proper

vehicle lighting in accordance with the

prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.

The system may be impaired or unavailable

when

Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,

or heavy spray

Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is

dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for

example

The system cannot recognize the following

road users:

RRoad users without a lighting system of

their own, e.g. pedestrians

RRoad users with dim lighting of their own,

e.g. cyclists

RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. road users behind a guardrail

RIn some seldomcases, even road userswith

a lighting system of their own may be

recognized too late or not at all.

The automatic high-beamheadlampswill then

not be deactivated or it will be activated in

spite of preceding or oncoming road users.

This could endanger you and/or others and

cause an accident. Always pay close attention

to the traffic situation and switch off the high

beam manually if necessary.

You can use this function to set the

headlamps to change between low beam and

high beam automatically. The system

recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either

approaching from the opposite direction or

traveling in front of your vehicle, and

consequently switches the headlamps from

high beam to low beam.

The system automatically adapts the low-

beam headlamp range depending on the

distance to the other vehicle. Once the

system no longer detects any other vehicles,

it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behind

the windshield near the overhead control

panel.


X To activate: activate the Adaptive

Highbeam Assist function using the on-

board computer (Y page 190).


X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow:

(Y page 98).

The_ indicator lamp in the

multifunction display lights up if it is dark

and the light sensor activates the low-beam

headlamps.

If you drive at speeds above approximately

28 mph (45 km/h):

the headlamp range is set automatically

depending on the distance between the

vehicle and other road users.

If you are driving at speeds above

approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no

other road users have been detected:

the high-beam headlamps are switched on

automatically. TheK indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster also lights up.

If you drive at speeds below approximately

30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users

are identified or if the roads are sufficiently

illuminated:

the high-beam headlamps are switched off

automatically. TheK indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster goes out. The_indicator lamp in the multifunction display

remains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combination

switch back to its normal position.

The_ indicator lamp in the

multifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if

there is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off.

The level of moisture diminishes,

depending on the length of the journey and

the weather conditions (humidity and

temperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified


Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

:p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off

;c To switch the front interior lighting

on

=v To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off

Interior lighting 101


Z

?| To switch the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

Ap To switch the right-hand front

reading lamp on/off

B To switch the automatic interior lighting

control on

Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: To switch the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

Important notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from

discharging, the interior lighting functions are

automatically deactivated after some time

unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the

ignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting control

X To switch on: set the switch to center

positionB.

X To switch off: set the switch to the|position.

The interior lighting automatically switches

on if you:

Runlock the vehicle

Ropen a door

Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

The interior light is activated for a short while

when the SmartKey is removed from the

ignition lock. You can activate this delayed

switch-off using the on-board computer

(Y page 191).

Manual interior lighting control

X To switch the front interior lighting on:

set the switch to thec position.

X To switch off the interior lighting: set the

switch to the| position or (if the door

is closed) to the center position.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/

off: press theu button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:

press thep button.

Crash-responsive emergency lighting

The interior lighting is activated automatically

if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazard

warning lamp button.

or

X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

key.

Replacing bulbs


Xenon bulbs

G DANGER

Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could

get an electric shock and be seriously or even

fatally injured if you touch the electric

contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never

remove the cover from Xenon bulbs.

Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, but

have them replaced at a qualified workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,

you can recognize this by the following: the

cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves

from the top to the bottom and back again

when you start the engine. For this to be

102 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

observed, the lights must be switched on

before starting the engine.

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of

vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure

that these function correctly at all times.

Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNING

Bulbs and lamps can become very hot. For

this reason, allow them to cool down before

changing them. Otherwise, you could burn

yourself when you touch them.

Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.

Otherwise, they could, for example, damage

the bulbs and injure themselves.

Never use a bulb which has been dropped.

Such a bulb may explode and injure you.

Halogen bulbs are pressurized and could

explode when you change them, especially if

they are very hot. You should therefore wear

eye protection and gloves when you are

changing them.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs

that you cannot replace. Replace only the

bulbs listed (Y page 103). Have the bulbs that

you cannot replace yourself changed at a


If you require assistance changing bulbs,

consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with

your bare hands. Even minor contamination

can burn into the glass surface and reduce

the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-

free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb

when installing.

Only use bulbs of the correct type.

If the new bulb still does not light up, consult


Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of

vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure

that these function correctly at all times.

Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can change the following bulbs. The bulb

type can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps

: Turn signal lamp:3457

; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W LL

? Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System

: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Replacing bulbs 103


Z

Tail lamp (halogen headlamps)

: Tail lamp/turn signal lamp/brake lamp:

P 21 W

; Inoperative

= Side marker lamp: P 21 W

? Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

A Backup lamp: W 16 W

Tail lamp (Bi-Xenon headlamps)

: Turn signal lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W

; Rear fog lamp: H 21 W

= Backup lamp: W 16 W

License plate lamp (vehicles with halogenheadlamps)

: License plate lamp: C 5 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing and installing the cover in the

front wheel housing

You must remove the cover from the front

wheel housing before you can change the

front bulbs.

X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.

X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.

Cover; is released.

X Push cover; down.

X To install: push cover; up.

X Turn rotary knob: through 90°.

Cover; is locked.


Low-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheel

housing (Y page 104).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise

and pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.

X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel

housing (Y page 104).

High-beam headlamps (halogen

headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.


and pull it out.


pull it out.




it clockwise.



Parking lamps/standing lamps

(halogen headlamps)


X Open the hood.


and pull it out.

X Pull out bulb holder;.



X Insert bulb holder;.



Replacing bulbs 105


Z

Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps)


X Open the hood.

X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise and

pull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.

X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwise

until it engages.

Cornering light function (Intelligent

Light System)


X Open the hood.


and pull it out.


pull it out.




it clockwise.



Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim

panels

You must open the side trim panel in the

cargo compartment before you can change

the bulbs in the tail lamps.

Left-hand side trim panel

Right-hand side trim panel

X To open: turn release knob: 90° in the

direction of the arrow and remove side trim

panel;.

X To close: insert side trim panel; and turn

release knob: 90° in the opposite

direction to the arrow.


Tail lamp

Turn signal lamp/tail lamp and brake

lamp


X Open the cargo compartment.

X Open the side trim panel (Y page 106).

X Press retaining lugs: simultaneously in

the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb

holder out.

Bulb holder

: Tail lamps/brake lamps4

; Inoperative lamps (vehicles without LEDs)

= Side marker lamp (vehicles without LEDs)

X Lightly press the corresponding bulb into

the holder, turn it counter-clockwise and

remove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the

bulb holder and turn it clockwise.

X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly.

The retaining lugs on the bulb holder

engage audibly.

X Close the side trim panel (Y page 106).

Backup lamp and rear fog lamp

Due to their location, have the bulbs in the

backup lamp and rear fog lamp in the tailgate

changed at a qualified specialist workshop.


X Open the tailgate.

X In recess? on the inside of the closing

handle, pry off and remove the upper

section of handle=with a flat and smooth

object, e.g. a screwdriver.

X Pull the lower section of handle: using a

sharp, suddenmovement to remove it from

the trim and then place it to one side.

X Reach under the right-hand side of trim

B and apply a gentle jolting force along the

entire length of the trim in order to unclip

it.

4 Vehicles with LEDs: turn signal/brake light only.

Replacing bulbs 107


Z

X Pull out connectorC of the surround

lighting by releasing the latches.

X Place trimB to one side.

X On the side where the bulb is to be

changed, unclip the remaining part of trim

D from the assembly using a sudden,

sharp movements, until bulb holderE is

accessible.

X Remove bulb holderE using both sides of

leverF.

Bulb holder

X Rear fog lampG: lightly press the

corresponding bulb into holderE, turn it

counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb

holderE.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holderE and

turn it clockwise.

X backup lampH: remove the bulb from

bulb holderE.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holderE.

X Re-insert bulb holderE until you hear

engage audibly.

X Position trimD and engage it in place by

tapping it with your hand.

X Before beginning the installation, check

that all the metal clips are inserted in the

parts placed to one side: 2 clips; in the

upper part of handle= and 5 clipsA in

trimB.

X If not, remove the missing metal clips from

the metal openings in the tailgate and

insert them in the appropriate places.

X Take trimB and connect plug connector

C to the surround lighting.

i The surround lighting only illuminateswhen the tailgate has been shut and

reopened.


X Position trimB and engage it in place by

tapping it with your hand, starting from the

outside.

X Clip in the lower section of handle: again.

X Insert and engage the upper section of

handle= into lower section:.

License plate lamp



X Position a screwdriver on lamp lens:

from the outside.

X Lever out lamp lens: and remove it.

X Replace the bulb.

X Insert lamp lens: into the license plate

lamp and press it in until it engages.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/

off

G WARNING

The windshield will not longer be wiped

properly if the wiper blades are worn. This

could prevent you from observing the traffic

conditions, thereby causing an accident.

Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally

in spring and fall.

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this could

damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

that has collected on the windshield can

scratch the glass if wiping takes placewhen

the windshield is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on thewindshield

wipers in dry weather conditions, always

use washer fluid when operating the

windshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has been

washed in an automatic car wash, wax or

other residues may be the reason for this.

Clean the windshield using washer fluid

after washing the vehicle in an automatic

car wash.

Combination switch

1$ Windshield wipers off

2Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)

3Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)

4° Continuous wipe, slow

5¯ Continuous wipe, fast

B í Single wipe/î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluid

X Switch on the ignition.

X Turn the combination switch to the

corresponding position.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if thewindshield becomes dirty in dry weather

conditions, the windshield wipers may be

activated inadvertently. This could then

damage the windshield wiper blades or

scratch the windshield.

Windshield wipers 109


Z

For this reason, you should always switch

off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in theÄ or

Å position, the appropriate wiping

frequency is automatically set according to

the intensity of the rain. In theÅ position,

the rain sensor is more sensitive than in

theÄ position, causing the windshield

wipers to wipe more frequently.

Switching the rear window wiper on/

off

Combination switch

: è Switch

2ô To wipe with washer fluid

3 I To switch on intermittent wiping

4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping

5ô To wipe with washer fluid


ignition lock.

X Turn switch: on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.

When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,

the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNING

For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and

remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

before replacing awiper blade. Otherwise, the

wipermotor could suddenly turn on and cause

injury.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiper

arm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from the

windshield/rear window.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without

a wiper blade back onto the windshield/

rear window.

Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when

you change the wiper blade. If you release

the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it

falls onto the windshield/rear window, the

windshield/rear window may be damaged

by the force of the impact.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the wiper blades changed at a qualified


Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades


lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

110 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Press both release clips;.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of

arrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction of

arrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade: with

recessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of

arrow= onto the wiper arm, until retaining

clips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seated

correctly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the

windshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

G WARNING

The wiper arm could be set in motion and

injure you if the wiper is switched on.

Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

before replacing the wiper blade.

Removing a wiper blade


lock.

X Fold wiper arm: away from the rear

window until it engages.

X Position wiper blade; at a right angle to

wiper arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiper

blade; in the direction of the arrow until

it releases.

X Remove wiper blade;.

Installing a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade; onto wiper

arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiper

blade; in the opposite direction to the

arrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seated

correctly.

X Position wiper blade; parallel to wiper

arm:.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the rear

window.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructed

Leaves or snow, for example, may be

obstructing the windshield wiper movement.

The wiper motor has been deactivated.

Windshield wipers 111


Z

X For safety reasons, you should remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.

X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperative

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

X Select another wiper speed on the

combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a


The spray nozzles are misaligned

The windshield washer fluid from the spray

nozzles no longer hits the center of the

windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.

X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a


112 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 114

Overview of climate control sys-

tems ................................................... 114

Operating the climate control sys-

tems ................................................... 118

Setting the air vents ......................... 123

113

Climatecontrol

Useful information










Overview of climate control systems


G WARNING

Observe the settings recommended on the

following pages. The windows could

otherwise fog up. This could prevent you from

observing the traffic conditions, thereby

causing an accident.

G WARNING

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)

may require replacement of the filter before

its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged

filter will reduce the air volume to the interior

and the windows could fog up, impairing

visibility and endangering you and others.

Have a blocked filter replaced at a Mercedes-

Benz Center as soon as possible.

The automatic climate control regulates the

temperature and the humidity of the vehicle

interior and filters out undesirable

substances from the air.

Automatic climate control is only operational

when the engine is running5. Optimum

operation is only achieved if you drivewith the

side windows and panorama roof with power

tilt/sliding panel closed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the

convenience opening feature (Y page 78).

This will speed up the cooling process and

the desired vehicle interior temperature

will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters out

pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount

of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For

this reason, you should always observe the

interval for replacing the filter, which is

specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

Since the replacement interval depends on

environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air

pollution, the interval may be shorter than

stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

5 Automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated when the ignition

is switched off.

114 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

: Sets the temperature (Y page 119)

; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 121)

= Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)

? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 122)

A Sets the airflow (Y page 120)

B Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 118)

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)


control

The following contains notes and

recommendations on optimum use of

automatic climate control.

RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by

turning control knobA clockwise to the

desired position (except position 0).

RSet the temperature to 22 †.

RRecommendation for preventing

fogged up windows with low outside

temperatures or rain: switch¯ on for

the air distribution and switchP and

O off if possible (Y page 120). In air-

recirculation mode, switchd off

(Y page 122). Set airflow controlA to a

setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 120).

RRecommendation for rapid cooling or

heatingof the vehicle interior: set airflow

controlA to a setting between 3 and 6

briefly (Y page 120).

RRecommendation for a constant

vehicle interior temperature: set airflow

controlA to a setting between 1 and 3

(Y page 120).

RRecommendation for air distribution in

the winter: setO and

¯(Y page 120).

Recommendation for air distribution in

the summer: setP orP and

¯(Y page 120).

ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,

e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors

or when in a tunnel. The windows could

Overview of climate control systems 115

Climatecontrol

Z

otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn

into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

RIf you change the settings of the climate

control system, the climate status display

appears for three seconds at the bottom of

the screen in the COMAND display, see the

separate COMAND Operating

Instructions6. You will see the current

settings of the various climate control

functions.

6 Only if you have the "COMAND Multimedia System".

116 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for 2-zone automatic climate control

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 119)

; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 119)

= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 121)

? Increases the airflow (Y page 120)

A Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)

B Display

C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 122)

D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 118)

E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 119)

F Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 122)

G Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 118)

H Reduces the airflow (Y page 120)

I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)

J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 120)


control

The following contains instructions and

recommendations to enable you to get the

most out of your automatic climate control.

RActivate climate control using theÃ and

¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the

Ã and¿ buttons light up.

RSet the temperature to 22 †.

ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,

e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors

or when in a tunnel. The windows could

otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn

into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's side

Overview of climate control systems 117

Climatecontrol

Z

for the front-passenger side as well. The

indicator lamp in theá button goes out.

RUse the residual heat function if you want

to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior

when the ignition is switched off. The

"residual heat" function can only be

activated or deactivated with the ignition

switched off.

Operating the climate control

systems

Activating/deactivating climate

control

Points to observe before use

G WARNING

When the climate control system is

deactivated, the outside air supply and

circulation are also deactivated. Only choose

this setting for a short time. Otherwise the

windows could fog up, impairing visibility and

endangering you and others.


Climate control


ignition lock.

X To switch on: turn controlA clockwise

to the desired position (except position 0)

(Y page 115).

X To switch off: turn controlA counter-

clockwise to position 0 (Y page 115).

3-zone automatic climate control


ignition lock.

X To switch on: press theÃ button.

The indicator lamp in theÃ button lights

up. Airflow and air distribution are set to

automatic mode.

or

X Press the^ button.

The indicator lamp in the^ button goes

out. The previously selected settings are

restored.

X To switch off: press button^.

The indicator lamp in the^ button lights

up.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: switchon climate control primarily using the

Ã button.

Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification


G WARNING

If you switch off the cooling function, the

vehicle will not be cooled when weather

conditions are warm. The windows can fog up

more quickly. This may prevent you from

observing the traffic conditions, thereby

causing an accident.

The cooling with air dehumidification function

is only available with dual-zone automatic

climate control and 3-zone automatic climate

control.

The cooling with air dehumidification function

is only available when the engine is running.

The air inside the vehicle is cooled and

dehumidified according to the temperature

selected.

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is

normal and not a sign that there is a

malfunction.

118 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

i The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction uses refrigerant R134a. This

refrigerant does not contain

chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does

not damage the ozone layer.


X To activate: press the¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the¿ button lights

up.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the¿ button goes

out. The cooling with air dehumidification

function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the cooling with air

dehumidification function

When you press the¿ button, the

indicator lamp in the button flashes three

times or remains off. You can no longer switch

on the cooling with air dehumidification

function.


Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNING

If you switch off the cooling function, the

vehicle will not be cooled when weather

conditions are warm. The windows can fog up

more quickly. Window fogging may impair

visibility and endanger you and others.

The automatic function is only available in

conjunction with 3-zone automatic climate

control.

In automatic mode, the set temperature is

maintained automatically at a constant level.

The system automatically regulates the

temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow

and the air distribution.

Automatic mode will achieve optimal

operation if cooling with air dehumidification

is also activated. If desired, cooling with air

dehumidification can be deactivated.


ignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.

X To activate: press theÃ button.

The indicator lamp in theÃ button lights

up. Automatic air distribution and airflow

are activated.

X To select manually: press the_button.

or

X Press theK orI button.

The indicator lamp in theÃ button goes

out. Automatic air distribution and airflow

are deactivated.

Setting the temperature

Climate control

You can set the temperature for the entire

vehicle.


ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn control:

clockwise or counter-clockwise

(Y page 115). Only change the temperature

setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.


Different temperatures can be set for the

driver's and front-passenger sides.


ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn control: or

E clockwise or counter-clockwise

(Y page 117). Only change the temperature

setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.

Operating the climate control systems 119

Climatecontrol

Z

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings

Climate control

¯ Directs air through the defroster vents

P Directs air through the center and side

air vents

O Directs the airflow through the

footwell air vents

i You can also activate several airdistribution settings simultaneously. To do

this, press multiple air distribution buttons.

The air is then directed through various

vents.


¯ Directs air through the defroster vents

P Directs air through the center and side

air vents

O Directs the airflow through the

footwell air vents

b Directs the airflow through the center

and side air vents as well as the

defroster vents

a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the side

air vents. The side air vents can only be

closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise

as far as possible.

Climate control


ignition lock.

X Press one or more of theP,O,

¯ buttons.

The corresponding indicator lamp lights up

briefly.



ignition lock.

X Press theÉ orË button until the

desired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflow

Climate control


ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn controlA

clockwise or counter-clockwise

(Y page 115).



ignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: press theK or

I button.

Switching the ZONE function on/off

This function is only available with 3-zone

automatic climate control.

X To activate: press theá button.

The indicator lamp in theá button lights

up.

The temperature setting for the driver's

side is not adopted for the front-passenger

side.

X To deactivate: press theá button.

The indicator lamp in theá button goes

out.

The temperature setting for the driver's

side is adopted for the front-passenger

side.


Defrosting the windshield

You can use this function to defrost the

windshield or to defrost the inside of the

windshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the defrostingfunction until the windshield is clear again.


ignition lock.

X To activate: press the¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the¬ button lights

up.

The climate control system switches to the

following functions:

Rhigh airflow

Rhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windshield and

front side windows

Rair-recirculation mode off

i The "defrosting" function automaticallysets the blower output to the optimum

defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow

may increase or decrease automatically

after the button is pressed.

i You can manually adjust the bloweroutput when the defrosting function is

active.

RDual-zone automatic climate control:

turn airflow controlA clockwise or

counter-clockwise (Y page 115).

R3-zone automatic climate control:

press theó orô button.

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.

The indicator lamp in the¬ button goes

out. The previously selected settings are

restored. Air-recirculation mode remains

deactivated.

or

X Press theÃ button7.

The indicator lamp in the¬ button goes

out. Airflow and air distribution are set to

automatic mode.

or

X Dual-zone automatic climate control:

turn temperature control: clockwise or

counter-clockwise (Y page 115).

3-zone automatic climate control: turn

temperature controls: orE clockwise

or counter-clockwise (Y page 117).

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Climate control

X Activate the¿ cooling with air

dehumidification function.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the defrosting function (Y page 121).

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.


X Activate the¿ cooling with air

dehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the defrosting function (Y page 121).


Windows fogged up on the outside

X Activate the windshield wipers.

X Set the air distribution toP orO.


7 3-zone automatic climate control only.

Operating the climate control systems 121

Climatecontrol

Z

Rear window defroster


G WARNING

Clear all windows of ice or snowbefore setting

off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could

endanger you and others.


ignition lock.

X Press the¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the¤ button lights

up or goes out.

The rear window defroster has a high current

draw. You should therefore switch it off as

soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,

the rear window defroster switches off

automatically after several minutes.

If the battery voltage is too low, the rear

window defroster may switch off.

Problems with the rear window

defroster

The rear window defroster has deactivated

prematurely or cannot be activated.

X Switch off any consumers that are not

required, e.g. reading lamps or interior

lighting.

When the battery is sufficiently charged,

the rear window defroster can be activated

again.

Activating/deactivating air-

recirculation mode

G WARNING

Only switch over to air-recirculation mode

briefly at low outside temperatures.

Otherwise, the windows could fog up,

impairing visibility and endangering you and

others. This may obstruct your view of the

traffic situation and, as a result, you may

cause an accident.

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if

unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle

from outside. The air already inside the

vehicle will then be recirculated.

The operation of air-recirculation mode is the

same for all control panels.


ignition lock.

X To activate: press thee button.

The indicator lamp in thee button lights

up.

i Air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outside

temperatures.When air-recirculationmode

is activated automatically, the indicator

lamp in thee button is not lit.

Outside air is added after about

30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thee button.

The indicator lamp in thee button goes

out.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates

automatically:

Rafter approximately five minutes at

outside temperatures below

approximately 5 †

Rafter approximately five minutes if the

cooling with air dehumidification

function8 is switched off

Rafter approximately 30 minutes at

outside temperatures above

approximately 5†with the "Coolingwith

air dehumidification" function switched

on8

Activating/deactivating the residual

heat function

The residual heat function is only available

with automatic climate control.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat

of the engine to continue heating the

8 Only with dual-zone/3-zone automatic climate control.


stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after

the engine has been switched off. The heating

time depends on the temperature that has

been set.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilation

will be activated. The blower runs at

medium speed.


ignition lock or remove it.

X To activate: press theÌ button.

The indicator lamp in theÌ button lights

up.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.

The indicator lamp in theÌ button goes

out.

i Residual heat is deactivated

automatically:

Rafter approximately 30 minutes

Rwhen the ignition is switched on

Rif the battery voltage drops

Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated

Setting the air vents


G WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air

vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to

bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the

vents. Keep bare skin away from these air

vents. If necessary, direct the airflow away to

a different area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,

please observe the following notes:

Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield

and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,

snow or leaves.

Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

in the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set the

direction of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set the

adjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn the

adjuster in one of center air vents:

counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn the

adjuster in one of center air vents:


Setting the air vents 123

Climatecontrol

Z

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent

; Side air vent

X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster

in side air vent; counter-clockwise.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster

in side air vent; clockwise until it

engages.

Setting the rear-compartment air

vents

: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right

= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel= up or

down.

124 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol


Breaking-in notes .............................. 126

Driving ............................................... 126

Automatic transmission ................... 132

Refueling ............................................ 139

Parking ............................................... 141

Driving tips ........................................ 144

Driving systems ................................ 150

125

Drivingandparking

Useful information










Breaking-in notes


New and replaced brake pads and discs only

reach their optimum braking effect after

several hundred kilometers of driving.

Compensate for this by applying greater force

to the brake pedal.

The first 1,000miles (1,500 km)

The more you look after the engine when it is

new, the more satisfied you will be with its

performance in the future.

RYou should therefore drive at varying

vehicle and engine speeds for the first

1,000 miles (1,500 km).

RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full

throttle, during this period.

RChange gear in good time, before the

tachometer needle isÔ of the way to the

red area of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.

RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator

pedal past the point of resistance

(kickdown).

RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),

drive in program E.

After 1,000 miles (1,500km), you can

increase the engine speed gradually and bring

the vehicle up to full speed.

i You should also observe these breaking-in notes if the engine or parts of the drive

train on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

Driving


G WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicle

is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter

the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats.

G WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage

of the pedals, e.g.:

Rshoes with thick soles

Rshoes with high heels

Rslippers


Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.

G WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

126 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fully

released when driving, the parking brake can:

Roverheat and cause a fire

Rlose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release

the parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it has

reached operating temperature.

Only shift the automatic transmission to

the desired drive position when the vehicle

is stationary.

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive

wheels when pulling away on slippery

roads. You could otherwise damage the

drive train.

SmartKey positions

g To remove the SmartKey

(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correct

SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not

switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine


G WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces

without sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalytic

converter to reach its operating

temperature. The sound of the engine may

change during this time.


X Shift the transmission to position P.

Transmission position display P is shown in

the multifunction display.

i When the transmission is in position N,you can also start the engine with the brake

pedal depressed.

Starting procedure


ignition lock (Y page 127) and release it as

soon as the engine is running.

Pulling away


i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if

you depress the brake pedal. Only then can

the parking lock be deactivated. If you do

not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT

SELECT lever can still be moved but the

parking lock remains engaged.

Driving 127

Drivingandparking

Z

i If the transmission oil temperature isbelow Ò4‡ (Ò20† ), you can only shift from

position P when the engine is running.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

X Release the brake pedal.

X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

The electric parking brake (Y page 142) is

automatically released.

The red! indicator lamp in the


i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doors

drop down.

You can open the doors from the inside at

any time.

You can also deactivate the automatic

locking feature (Y page 191).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps the

catalytic converter to reach its operating

temperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

G WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no

longer brake your vehicle and it could roll

away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from the

brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never

leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start

assist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away

forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.

It holds the vehicle for a short time after you

have removed your foot from the brake pedal.

This gives you enough time to move your foot

from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal

and to depress it before the vehicle begins to

roll.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.

The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.

Hill start assist will not function if:

Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on

a downhill gradient.

Rthe transmission is in position N.

Rthe electric parking brake is applied.

RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function


G WARNING

If the engine is switched off automatically and

you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.

There is a risk of accident and injury.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off

the ignition and secure the vehicle against

rolling away.

General notes

If the¤ symbol is shown in the

multifunction display, the ECO start/stop

function switches the engine off

automatically when the vehicle stops.

The engine starts automatically when the

driver wants to pull away again. The ECO

start/stop function thereby helps you to

reduce the fuel consumption and emissions

of your vehicle.

The stop/start function is automatically

activated each time you start the engine with

the SmartKey.

If the ECO start/stop function has been

manually deactivated (Y page 130) or a

malfunction has caused the system to be

deactivated, the¤ symbol is not

displayed.


Automatic engine switch-off

General notes

The ECO start/stop function is operational

and the¤ symbol is displayed in the

multifunction display, if:

Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.

Rthe outside temperature is within the

comfort range.

Rthe engine is at normal operating

temperature.

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.

Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.

Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioning

system is switched on.

Rthe hood is closed.

Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-off

have not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol will

not be shown.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stopped

automatically.

i The engine can be switched offautomatically a maximum of four times

(first stop and three subsequent stops) in

succession. Automatic engine switch-off is

possible again once the ECO symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theclimate control system only operates at a

reduced capacity. If you require full climate

control capacity, the ECO start/stop

function can be deactivated by pressing the

ECO button (Y page 130).

Vehicles with automatic transmission

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or

N, the ECO start/stop function switches off

the engine automatically.

i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if the

engine has been switched off

automatically. It is then not necessary to

continue applying the brakes during the

automatic stop phase. When you depress

the accelerator pedal, the engine starts

automatically and the braking effect of the

HOLD function is deactivated. Depress the

accelerator pedal carefully, as the engine

must be started first.

Automatic engine start

General notes

The engine starts automatically if:

Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function

by pressing the ECO button.

Ryou engage reverse gear R.

Rthe vehicle starts to roll.

Rthe brake system requires this.

Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior

deviates from the set range.

Rthe system detects moisture on the

windshield when the air-conditioning

system is switched on.

Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.

Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the

driver's door is opened.


The engine is started automatically if you:

Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not

activated and the transmission is in

position D or N

Rdepress the accelerator pedal

Rmove the transmission out of position P.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is available

again as soon as the¤ symbol

reappears in the multifunction display.

Driving 129

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function

ECO button

X To switch off: press button:.

Indicator lamp; on button: and the

¤ symbol in themultifunction display go

out.

X To switch on: press button:.

Indicator lamp; lights up.

If all conditions for automatic engine

switch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is

shown in the multifunction display.

If not all conditions for automatic engine

switch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is

not shown in the multifunction display. If

this is the case, the ECO start/stop

function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/

stop function has been deactivated

manually or as the result of a malfunction.

The engine will then not be switched off

automatically when the vehicle stops.

i The ECO start/stop function is activatedeach time the engine is switched on.


Problems with the engine


The engine does not

start.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 160) or DISTRONIC

PLUS (Y page 152).

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not

start. The starter motor

can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.

X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before

attempting to start the engine again.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 127). Avoid excessively

long and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drain

the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:


The engine does not

start. You cannot hear

the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak

or discharged.

X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 283).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.

X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.

X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:


Driving 131

Drivingandparking

Z


The engine is not

running smoothly and

is misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

component of the engine management system.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic

converter and damage it.

The coolant

temperature display is

showing more than

248 ‡ (120 †). The

coolant warning lamp

may also be lit and a

warning tone may

sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine

is no longer being cooled sufficiently.

X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant

to cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 263). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.



G WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling speed

and you engage transmission position D or

R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There

is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or R,

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do

not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to

neutral position N when you switch off the

engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a


After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked

vehicle from rolling away by applying the

parking brake.

G WARNING

The clutch may overheat if you hold the

vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by

depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch

does overheat, a warning tone sounds and a

displaymessage is shown in themultifunction

display. The frictional connection of the clutch

may then be interrupted. The vehicle may roll

away. As a result, you could cause an

accident.

You will only be able to continue your journey

once the clutch has cooled down and the

display message in the multifunction display

has disappeared.

Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill

gradients by depressing the accelerator.

Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary

on uphill gradients by:

Rdepressing the brake pedal

or

Ractivating the HOLD function

or

Rengaging the electric parking brake

132 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

TheDIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the

steering column.

j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear

i Neutral

h Drive

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The current

transmission position P, R, N or D appears

in the transmission position display

(Y page 133) in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive

program display

The current transmission position and drive

program appear in the multifunction display.

: Transmission position display

; Drive program display

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into which

transmission positions you can change

using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, you

should pull away carefully to checkwhether

the desired transmission position is

engaged. Ideally, you should select

transmission position D and drive program

E or S.

Engaging park position P

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the

direction of arrow P.

Transmission position display P is shown in


i When you engage park position P, makesure that the transmission position display

shows P in the multifunction display.

i You can only engage park positionPwhenthe vehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts into

park position P automatically:

Rif you open the driver's door while the

vehicle is stationary in transmission

position D or R

Rif you open the door while traveling at

very low speeds in transmission position

D or R

In addition, a warning tone sounds and a

display message is shown.

i Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or down

disengages the parking lock. The

transmission is in N neutral.

If the transmission oil temperature is below

Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift from park

position P when the engine is running.

In order to shift from park position P

directly into R or D:

Rdepress the brake pedal and

Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or

down past the first point of resistance

! If the engine speed is too high or thevehicle is moving, do not shift the

Automatic transmission 133

Drivingandparking

Z

automatic transmission directly from D to

R, from R to D or directly to P. The

automatic transmission could otherwise be

damaged.

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

i The ECO start/stop function is notavailable when reverse gear is engaged.

Further information on the ECO start/stop

function (Y page 128).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the

first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N


brake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down

to the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, the

automatic transmission automatically

switches to N.

Remaining in neutral N

If the automatic transmission is to remain in

neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car

washes with a towing device, please observe

the following instructions:

G WARNING

When leaving the SmartKey in the starter

switch, do not leave children unattended in

the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch

on the ignition which could result in

unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.

Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could

result in an accident and/or serious personal

injury.

Rmake sure that the ignition is switched on.

Rwhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Rshift to neutral N.

Rrelease the brake pedal.

Rif the electric parking brake is engaged,

release it.

Rswitch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position D


brake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past

the first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park position

Do not shift the transmission into

position P unless the vehicle is

stationary (Y page 141). The

parking lock should not be used as

a brake when parking. Always

apply the electronic parking brake

in addition to the parking lock in

order to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle electronics are

malfunctioning, the transmission

may be locked in position P.

Have the vehicle electronics

checked immediately at a qualified


C Reverse gear

Only shift the transmission to R

when the vehicle is stationary.


A Neutral

No power is transmitted from the

engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you

to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to

push it or tow it.

If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:

only shift the transmission to

positionN if the vehicle is in danger

of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

When you switch off the engine, the

automatic transmission

automatically shifts into neutral N.

7 Drive

The automatic transmission

changes gear automatically. All

forward gears are available.

Changing gear

The automatic transmission shifts to the

individual gears automatically when it is in

transmission position D. This automatic

gearshifting behavior is determined by:

Rthe selected drive program (Y page 135)

Rthe position of the accelerator pedal

Rthe road speed

Driving tips

Kickdown

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:

X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

The transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the

desired speed is reached.

The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free

Shifting the transmission repeatedly between

gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if

it has become stuck in slush or snow. The

vehicle's engine management restricts

repeated shifting between gears up to a

maximum speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift

back and forth between transmission

positions D and R, move the selector lever up

and down beyond the pressure point.

Working on the vehicle

G WARNING

When working on the vehicle, engage the

electric parking brake and shift the automatic

transmission into park position P. Otherwise,

the vehicle could roll away and cause an

accident and/or serious injuries.

Program selector button

General notes

The program selector button allows you to

choose between drive programs with

different driving characteristics.

Example: program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economical

driving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting


Drivingandparking

Z

Only change from automatic drive program

E or S to manual drive program M when the

vehicle is stationary.

X Press program selector button:

repeatedly until the letter for the desired

gearshift program appears in the

multifunction display.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time the

engine is started.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 136).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts

down)

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts

up)

In drive program M, you can change gear

yourself using the steering wheel paddle

shifters.

If you pull the left or right steering wheel

paddle shifter when in automatic drive

program E or S, the automatic transmission

shifts into drive programM for a limited time.

Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,

the automatic transmission immediately

shifts into the next gear down or up.

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when the

transmission is in position D.

i For further information on the manualdrive program, see (Y page 136).

Automatic drive program

Drive program E is characterized by the

following:

Rcomfort-oriented engine settings

Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting up

sooner

Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears, unless the

accelerator pedal is depressed fully

Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, for

example

Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle being

driven at lower engine speeds and the

wheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by the

following:

Rsporty engine settings

Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

later

Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatic

transmission shift points

Manual drive program

Introduction

In manual drive program M, you can change

gear yourself by using the steering wheel

paddle shifters. For this, the transmission

must be in position D. The gear currently

selected and engaged is shown in the


Manual drive program M differs from drive

programs E and S with regard to spontaneity,

responsiveness and smoothness of gear

changes.


Gear Driving situations

= You can use the engine's braking

effect

5 To use the braking effect of the

engine on downhill gradients and

for driving:

Ron steep mountain roads

Rin mountainous terrain

Rin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of the

engine on extremely steep downhill

gradients and on long downhill

stretches

Switching on the manual drive program

Activating permanently

X Press the program selector button

(Y page 135) repeatedly untilM appears in


Manual drive program M remains active

until drive program E or S is engaged.

Activating temporarily

X Pull the right or left steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 136).

M is shown in the multifunction display.

Manual drive program M is temporarily

active. Depending on which paddle shifter

is pulled, the automatic transmission

immediately shifts into the next gear down

or up.

i When manual drive program M isactivated via the steering wheel paddle

shifters, the temporarily active manual

drive program M will be deactivated

automatically after a limited time, if the

driving situation permits. In this case, the

automatic transmission shifts into the

automatic drive program that was last

engaged, i.e. E or S. When driving on

downhill gradients, the temporarily active

manual drive program M will only be

deactivated if the accelerator pedal is

depressed while the vehicle is rolling

downhill.

Upshifting

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle


The automatic transmission shifts up to the

next gear.

X Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol

appears in the display instead of M.

i To prevent engine damage the automatic

transmission shifts up automatically:

Rif the maximum engine speed on the

currently engaged gear is reached and

Ryou continue to accelerate.

Downshifting

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle


The automatic transmission shifts down to

the next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission

automatically shifts down.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the

transmission selects the optimum gear for

the current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, the

automatic transmission protects against

engine damage by not shifting down.

Kickdown

You can also use kickdown for maximum

acceleration in manual drive program M.

X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.

The transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed is

reached.


Drivingandparking

Z

i During kickdown, you cannot change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters.

i If you apply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gear

when the maximum engine speed is

reached. This prevents the engine from

overrevving.

Switching off themanual drive program

X Press the program selector button

(Y page 135) repeatedly until E or S


Deactivating the temporary manual drive

program

X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter until the automatic

transmission shifts into the last active

automatic drive program: E or S.

i If manual drive programM is deactivated,the automatic transmission in automatic

drive program E or S may shift from the

current gear into a higher or lower gear.

This is dependent on the position of the

accelerator pedal, speed and load.


Problems with the transmission


The transmission has

problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability

is deteriorating.

The transmission no

longer shifts into all of

the gears.

Reverse gear can no

longer be engaged.

The transmission is in emergency mode.

X Stop the vehicle.


X Switch off the engine.

X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.

X Shift the transmission to position D.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist


Refueling


G WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel

incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and

explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before

refueling.

G WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.


You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:

RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance

without delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not induce

vomiting.

RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING

Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and

ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and

explosion.

Touch the vehicle body immediately before

opening the fuel filler cap. Any existing

electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the

ignition if you accidentally refuel with the

wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter

the fuel system. Even small amounts of the

wrong fuel could result in damage to the

fuel system and the engine. The repair

costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist

workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel

lines drained completely.

Refueling 139

Drivingandparking

Z

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage the

paintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection

system could be blocked by particles from

the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray

out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

Further information on fuel and on fuel grades

can be found in the "Fuel" section

(Y page 324).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap

; Tire pressure table

= To insert the fuel filler cap

? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked

automatically when you open or close the

vehicle with the SmartKey.

The position of the fuel filler cap is shown in

the instrument clusteræ. The arrowon the

filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening



lock.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow:.

The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise

and remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder

bracket on the inside of filler flap=.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,

fuel may leak out.

Closing

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn

clockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open,the reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. In

addition, the; Check Engine warning

lamp may light up. A message appears in

the multifunction display (Y page 208).

For further information on warning and

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,

see (Y page 226).

140 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from the

vehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNING

Risk of explosion or fire.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately

and remove it (Y page 127).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.


The fuel filler flap

cannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

or

The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).

or

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.


Parking


G WARNING

If flammable materials such as leaves, grass

or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to

parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they

could ignite. There is a risk of fire.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable

materials come into contact with parts of the

vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not

to park on dry grassland or harvested grain

fields.

G WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for

example:

Rreleasing the parking brake

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position P

Rstarting the engine.

They could also operate the vehicle's

equipment. There is a risk of an accident and

injury.


SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! A moving vehicle can lead to damage tothe vehicle or damage to the drive train.

Parking 141

Drivingandparking

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:

Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.

Rthe transmission must be in position P and

the transmission position display must

show P.

Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the

ignition lock.

Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front

wheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine


G WARNING

The automatic transmission switches to

neutral position N when you switch off the

engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a


After switching off the engine, always switch

to parking position P. Prevent the parked

vehicle from rolling away by applying the

parking brake.


X Apply the electric parking brake.



ignition lock and remove it.

The immobilizer is activated.

i If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, the

automatic transmission shifts to N

automatically.

If you then open one of the front doors or

remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the

automatic transmission shifts to P.

If you shift the automatic transmission to

N before switching off the engine, the

automatic transmission remains in N even

if a door is opened.

i The automatic transmission shifts to P

automatically if you:

Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey

and remove the SmartKey from the

ignition lock or

Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey

and open a front door.

If you attempt to turn off the engine when the

selector lever is not in position P:

Ra message appears in the multifunction

display

Ra warning signal sounds

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNING

If you leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for

example:

Rreleasing the parking brake

Rshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position P

Rstarting the engine.

They could also operate the vehicle's

equipment. There is a risk of an accident and

injury.


SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while the

142 ParkingDrivingandparking

engine is switched off. The sounds that can

be heard while this is occurring are normal.

Applying/releasing manually

Applying

X Push handle:.

When the electric parking brake is

engaged, the! red indicator lamp lights

up in the instrument cluster.

i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

Releasing


ignition lock.

X Pull handle:.

The red! indicator lamp in the


i The electric parking brake can only bereleased if the SmartKey is in position 1 in

the ignition lock.

Applying automatically

The electric parking brake is applied

automatically:

Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a

standstill or

Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle

stationary

In addition, at least one of the following

conditions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine is switched off.

Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt

is not fastened.

Rthere is a system malfunction.

Rthe power supply is insufficient.

Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy

period.

The red! indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.

i The electric parking brake is notautomatically engaged if the engine is

switched off by the ECO start/stop

function.

Releasing automatically

i The electric parking brake can only bereleased automatically on vehicles with

automatic transmission.

Your vehicle's electric parking brake is

automatically released if all of the following

conditions are met:

Rthe engine is running.

Rthe transmission is in position D or R.

Rthe seat belt has been fastened.

Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.

If the transmission is in positionR, the tailgate

must be closed.

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically

release the electric parking brake:

Rthe driver's door is closed.

Ryou shift out of position P or you have

previously driven faster than 2 mph

(3 km/h).

Emergency braking

The vehicle can also be braked during an

emergency by using the electric parking

brake.

X While driving, push handle:of the electric

parking brake (Y page 142).

i The vehicle is braked for as long ashandle: of the electric parking brake is

pressed. The longer electric parking brake

handle: is depressed, the greater the

braking force.

During braking:

Ra warning tone sounds.

Rthe Please Release Parking Brake

message appears.

Rthe red! indicator lamp in the

instrument cluster flashes.

Parking 143

Drivingandparking

Z

When the vehicle has been braked to a

standstill, the electric parking brake is

engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than

four weeks, the battery may be damaged by

exhaustive discharging.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than

six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as

a result of lack of use.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist

workshop.

Driving tips

General notes


G WARNING

Always remember that you must concentrate

primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's

concentration must always be directed

primarily at road traffic. For your own safety

and that of others, we recommend that you

stop the vehicle at a safe place and in

accordance with the traffic conditions before

making or accepting a phone call.

Comply with all legal requirements if you use

the telephone while driving. Use the hands-

free system and only use the telephone when

road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In

some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers

to use mobile phones while driving.

Only operate the audio system or COMAND

(Cockpit Management and Data System) in

compliance with all legal requirements and

when the road, weather and traffic conditions

permit. You may otherwise not be able to

observe the traffic conditions, endangering

yourself and others.

Remember that your vehicle covers a distance

of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second when

it is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately

50 km/h).

G WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,

safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,

for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Drive sensibly – save fuel

Observe the following tips to save fuel:

RThe tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.

RRemove unnecessary loads.

RRemove roof racks when they are not

needed.

RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.

RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.

RHave all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or by the service

interval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when

driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic

and in mountainous terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and

driving are very dangerous combinations.

Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

affect your reflexes, perceptions and

judgment.

144 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

The possibility of a serious or even fatal

accident are greatly increasedwhen you drink

or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow

anyone to drive who has been drinking or

taking drugs.

Exhaust check

G WARNING

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust

gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave

the engine running in enclosed spaces

without sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep

the level of poisonous components in exhaust

fumes within legal limits.

These systems only work at peak efficiency if

they are serviced exactly in accordance with

the manufacturer's specifications. For this

reason, only have work on the engine carried

out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-

Benz technicians.

The engine settings must not be changed

under any circumstances. Furthermore, all

specific service work must be carried out at

regular intervals and in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details

can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how

economical your driving characteristics are.

The ECO display assists you in achieving the

most economical driving style for the

selected settings and existing conditions.

Consumption can be significantly influenced

by your driving style.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:

RAcceleration

RConstant

RCoasting

The percentage count is themean value of the

three bar values. The three bars and themean

value begin at the value of 50%. A higher

percentage count indicates a more

economical driving style.

The ECO display does not indicate the actual

fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count

in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed

consumption figure in mpg (l/100 km).

In addition to driving style, the consumption

is affected by many other factors, such as:

RLoad

RTire pressure

RCold start

RChoice of route

RThe use of electrical consumers

These factors are not included in the ECO

display.

The evaluation of your driving style takes the

following three categories into consideration:

Acceleration (evaluation of all

acceleration processes)

The bar fills up: The bar empties:

Moderate

acceleration,

especially at higher

speeds

Sporty acceleration

Driving tips 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Smooth driving (assessment of driving

behavior at all times)


Constant speed and

avoidance of

unnecessary

acceleration and

deceleration

Fluctuations in

speed

Coasting (assessment of all deceleration

processes)


Anticipatory driving,

keeping your

distance and early

release of the

accelerator: the

vehicle can coast

without use of the

brakes

Frequent braking

i An economical driving style involvesdriving with a moderate engine speed.

To achieve a higher value in the categories

"acceleration" and "smooth driving":

Robserve the gearshift recommendation.

Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the freeway, only the bar for "smooth

driving" will change.

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journey

to its completion. Therefore, there are

dynamic changes in the bars at the start of

a journey. During a prolonged driving time,

these changes are smaller. For dynamic

changes, perform a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display

(Y page 183).

Braking


G WARNING

If you shift down on a slippery road surface in

an attempt to increase the engine's braking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding and

accidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine

braking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to

a lower gear in good time. This allows you

to take advantage of the engine's braking

effect. For this, you need to have selected

manual drive programM. This helps you to

avoid overheating the brakes and wearing

them out excessively.

When you take advantage of the engine's

braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn

for some time, e.g. on a slippery road

surface. This could cause damage to the

drive train. This type of damage is not

covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

i Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon downhill gradients while the manual

drive program M is temporarily activated:

the automatic transmission may switch to

the last active automatic drive program E

or S. The automatic transmission may shift

to a higher gear. This can reduce the

engine's braking effect.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING

If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, the braking system can overheat. This

increases the stopping distance and can even

cause the braking system to fail. There is a



Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

depress the brake pedal and the accelerator

pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear to

the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy

load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.

Drive on for a short while. This allows the

airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain

without braking, there may be a delayed

reaction from the brakeswhen braking for the

first time.

Thismay also occur after the vehicle has been

driven through deep water.

You have to depress the brake pedal more

firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front.

After driving on a wet road or having the

vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying

attention to the traffic conditions. This will

warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them

more quickly and protecting them against

corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-

treated roads

If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt

residue may form on the brake discs and

brake pads. This can result in a significantly

longer braking distance.

RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do not

endanger other road users when doing so.

RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear a

warning tone while the engine is running,

the brake fluid level may be too low.

Observe additional warning messages in


The brake fluid level may be too low due to

brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.

Have the brake system checked

immediately. This work should be carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axle

dynamometer. If you are planning to have

the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,

contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center to obtain further information first.

Otherwise, you could damage the drive

train or the brake system.

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignition

must be switched off (the SmartKey must

be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:

Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a

brake dynamometer (for a maximum of

ten seconds)

Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle

raised.

Braking triggered automatically by ESP®

may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the

brake system must be carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop. Consult a

qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

Have brake pads installed and brake fluid

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the brake system has only been subject to

moderate loads, you should test the

functionality of your brakes at regular

intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake

pedal when driving at a high speed. This

improves the grip of the brake pads.

Driving tips 147

Drivingandparking

Z

You can find a description of Brake Assist

(BAS) on (Y page 60).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

have brake pads/linings installed on your

vehicle which have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond

to an equivalent quality standard. Brake

pads/linings which have not been approved

for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not

of an equivalent quality could affect your

vehicle's operating safety.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

use brake fluid that has been specially

approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,

or which corresponds to an equivalent quality

standard. Brake fluid which has not been

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or

which is not of an equivalent quality could

affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Checking brake lining thickness

You can measure the break pad/lining

thickness using a test gauge. Color-coding

(green or red) on the test gauge allows you to

determine whether the brake pad/lining

thickness is still sufficient. The test gauge is

in the vehicle document wallet in the glove

box.

Front wheel

Rear wheel

X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable

position so that you can attach test gauge

A.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 141).

X Move the selector lever to position P.


X Place test gaugeA between the wheel's

spokes on brake pad/lining=.

X Hold test gaugeA vertically on brake

disc: and slide measuring pin; onto

brake disc:.

X Check which color field? the arrow on

measuring pin; is pointing to.

Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is

sufficient.

Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not

sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining

checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i To avoid an inaccurate measurement:

Rmake sure you position the wheels

suitably

Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess

in the brake disc


Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning

If water has accumulated to a certain depth

on the road surface, there is a danger of

hydroplaning occurring, even if:

Ryou drive at low speeds.

Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or

in conditions in which hydroplaning may

occur, you must drive in the following

manner:

Rlower your speed.

Ravoid ruts.

Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before driving

through it. Drive slowly through standing

water. Otherwise, water may enter the

vehicle interior or the engine compartment.

This can damage the electronic

components in the engine or the automatic

transmission. Water can also be drawn in

by the engine's air suction nozzles and this

can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

General notes

G WARNING





accidents.



G DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate

ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the

vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of

fatal injury.

If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating

running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area

around the vehicle are clear of snow. To

ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open

a window on the side of the vehicle that is not

facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"

section (Y page 294).

Driving with summer tires

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"


Slippery road surfaces

G WARNING





accidents.



G WARNING

The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device

and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the

freezing point do not guarantee that the road

surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,

especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be

stopped when moving at low speed:

X Shift the transmission to position N.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road

surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering

Driving tips 149

Drivingandparking

Z

and brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruise

control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 295).

Driving systems

Cruise control


If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise

control can neither reduce the risk of an

accident nor override the laws of physics.

Cruise control cannot take into account the

road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise

control is only an aid. You are responsible for

the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle

speed, for braking in good time and for

staying in lane.

Do not use cruise control:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.

in heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheels

to lose traction and the vehicle could then

skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

General notes

Cruise control maintains a constant road

speed for you. It brakes automatically in order

to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and

steep downhill gradients, especially if the

vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in

good time. For this, you will need to have

selected manual drive program

M(Y page 146). By doing so, you will make

use of the braking effect of the engine, which

relieves the load on the brake system and

prevents the brakes from overheating and

wearing too quickly.

Use cruise control only if road and traffic

conditions make it appropriate to maintain a

steady speed for a prolonged period. You can

store any road speed above 20 mph

(30 km/h).

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed

; To activate or reduce speed

= To deactivate cruise control

? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed

When you activate cruise control, the stored

speed is shown in the multifunction display

for five seconds.

In the multifunction display, the segments

between the stored speed and the maximum

speed light up.

Activation conditions

To activate cruise control, all of the following

activation conditions must be fulfilled:

Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

RESP® must be active, but not intervening.

Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,

the selector lever must be in position D.

150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Storing, maintaining and calling up a

speed

Storing and maintaining the current

speed

You can store the current speed if you are

driving faster than 20 mph (30km/h).

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.

Cruise control is activated. The vehicle

automatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. The

stored speed is resumed when the gradient

evens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients by

automatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up the

last stored speed

G WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs

from the current speed, the vehicle

accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know

the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate

or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an

accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic

conditions before calling up the stored speed.

If you do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward

you?.


pedal.

The first time cruise control is activated, it

stores the current speed or regulates the

speed of the vehicle to the previously

stored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

the speed set.

X Press the cruise control lever up: for a

higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph

increments (1 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: or

down; to the pressure point.

Every time the cruise control lever is

pressed up: or down; the last speed

stored is increased or reduced.


increments (10 km/h increments):

briefly press the cruise control lever

up: or down; to the pressure point.




i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For

example, if you accelerate briefly to

overtake, cruise control adjusts the

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored

after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruise

control:


forwards=.

or

X Brake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:

Ryou engage the electric parking brake.

Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.

Ryou shift the transmission to position N

while driving.

Driving systems 151

Drivingandparking

Z

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear

a warning tone. You will see the Cruise

Control Off message in the multifunction

display for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS


G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:

Rpeople or animals

Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.

stopped or parked vehicles

Roncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither give

warnings nor intervene in such situations.




G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly

identify other road users and complex traffic

situations.

In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicle

Rneither give a warning nor intervene

Raccelerate unexpectedly


Continue to drive carefully and be ready to

brake, in particular when warned to do so by

DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up

to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this

braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS

warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk

of an accident.

In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and

try to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes

automatically in certain situations. To

prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in

the following or other similar situations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk

of accident nor override the laws of physics.

DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account

the road, traffic and weather conditions.

DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are


front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

time and for staying in lane.

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:

Rin road and traffic conditions which do not

allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.

in heavy traffic or on winding roads

Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheels

to lose traction and the vehicle could then

skid

Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow

vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or

vehicles driving on a different line.





Rsnow or heavy rain


Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in

parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a

vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may


unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the

stored speed.

This speed may:

Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane

or an exit lane

Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand

lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-

hand lane

Rbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lane

that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand

lane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new

driver of the speed stored.

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and

automatically helps you maintain the

distance to the vehicle detected in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so

that the set speed is not exceeded.

On long and steep downhill gradients,

especially if the vehicle is laden, you must

select a low gear in good time. For this, you

will need to have selected manual drive

programM(Y page 146). By doing so, you will

make use of the braking effect of the engine,

which relieves the load on the brake system

and prevents the brakes from overheating

and wearing too quickly.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving

vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order

to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle

in front.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk

of a collision, you will be warned visually and

acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot

prevent a collision without your intervention.

An intermittent warning tone will then sound

and the distance warning lamp will light up in

the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in

order to increase the distance to the vehicle

in front or take evasive action provided it is

safe to do so.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically

deactivated if:

Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front

or

Rthe vehicle in front is no longer detected

If there is no vehicle driving in front of you,

DISTRONIC PLUS functions like cruise

control at a speed range between 20 mph

(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If a

vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in

the speed range between 0mph (0 km/h) and

120 mph (200 km/h).

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on

roads with steep gradients.

As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,

it can resemble the radar detectors of the

responsible authorities. You can refer to the

relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if

questions are asked about this.

i This device complies with the RSS-210Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is



and




Removal, tampering, or altering of the

device will void any warranties, and is not

permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use

the device in any non-approved way.




Driving systems 153

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higher

speed

; To store the current speed or a lower

speed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

? To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speed

A To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,

maintaining and calling up a speed


To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the

following activation conditions must be

fulfilled:

Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away before

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.

Rthe electric parking brake must be

released.

RESP® must be active, but not intervening.

Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must be

fastened.

Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

must be closed.

Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating

To activate while driving: when driving at

speeds below 14 mph (20 km/h), you can

only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle

in front has been detected and is shown in the

multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is

no longer detected and displayed,

DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone

sounds.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you?, or press it up: or down;.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly

up: or down; until the desired speed

is set.


pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the

vehicle in front, but only up to the desired

stored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive

message appears in the multifunction

display. The set distance to a slower-

moving vehicle in front will then not be

maintained. You will be driving at the speed

you determine by the position of the

accelerator pedal.

To activate when driving towards a

stationary vehicle: if the vehicle in front is

stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC

PLUS if your vehicle is also stationary.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you?, or press it up: or down;.

DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 14mph (20 km/h) if a vehicle in front

has been detected. It is therefore helpful to

have the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display

activated in the multifunction display

(Y page 187).

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly

up: or down; until the desired speed

is set.


i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on the

cruise control lever to set the specified

minimum distance (Y page 157).

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or

two segments; in the set speed range light

up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly from

the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,

segments; between speed of the vehicle in

front: and stored speed= light up.

Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display

: DISTRONIC PLUS activated

; Own vehicle

= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable

? Vehicle in front, if detected

In the Assistance menu (Y page 187) of the

on-board computer, you can select the

distance display.

X Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer

(Y page 187).

i You will see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate DISTRONIC

PLUS.

Driving

If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is

deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Pulling away

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove

your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever

(Y page 154) towards you.

or

X Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its

speed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC

PLUS operates in the same way as cruise

control.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle

in front has slowed down, it brakes your

vehicle. In this way, the distance you have

selected is maintained.


in front is driving faster, it accelerates your

vehicle, but only up to the speed you have

stored.

Changing lanes

If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC

PLUS supports you when:

Ryou are driving faster than 40mph

(60 km/h).

RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the

distance to a vehicle in front.

Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal.

RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collision.

Driving systems 155

Drivingandparking

Z

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle

is accelerated. Acceleration will be

interrupted if changing lanes takes too long

or if the distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drive

vehicles and the right lane on right-hand

drive vehicles.

Stopping

G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked

only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a

vehicle occupant or from outside the

vehicle.

Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected.

Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.



DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 157).


in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until

it is stationary.

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains

stationary and you do not need to depress the

brake.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to a

standstill at a sufficient distance behind the

vehicle in front. The specified minimum

distance is set using the control on the

cruise control lever.

The electric parking brake automatically

secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is

activated and:

Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is

automatically switched off by the ECO

start/stop function.

Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If amalfunction occurs, then the transmission

may be shifted into position P automatically.

Storing the current speed or calling up the

last stored speed

G WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and it differs

from the current speed, the vehicle

accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know

the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate

or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an

accident.

Pay attention to the road and traffic

conditions before calling up the stored speed.

If you do not know the stored speed, store the

desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever

(Y page 154) towards you.


pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first

time it is activated, the current speed is

stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise

speed to the previously stored value.


Setting a speed

G WARNING

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment

until the vehicle has made the necessary

adjustments.

Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to

a value that the prevailing road conditions and

legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden

and unexpected acceleration or deceleration

of the vehicle could cause an accident and/

or serious injury to you and others.

: To store the current speed or a higher

speed

; To store the current speed or a lower

speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for a

higher speed or down; for a lower speed.


increments (1 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: or

down; to the pressure point.





increments (10 km/h increments):

briefly press the cruise control lever

up: or down; to the pressure point.


pressed up: or down;, the last speed


i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you

accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS

adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last

speed stored after you have finished

overtaking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistance

You can set the specified minimum distance

for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span

between one and two seconds. With this

function, you can set the minimum distance

that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in

front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can

see this distance in the multifunction display

(Y page 155).

i Make sure that you maintain theminimum distance to the vehicle in front as

required by law. Adjust the distance to the

vehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control= in

direction;.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater

distance between your vehicle and the

vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= in

direction:.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter

distance between your vehicle and the

vehicle in front.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases

the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a

Driving systems 157

Drivingandparking

Z

speed below 14 mph (20 km/h) by the

system, provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does

not detect a vehicle directly ahead. At this

point, the driver must apply the brakes in

order to slow down further and bring the

vehicle to a standstill.

There are several ways to deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS:


forwards:.

or

X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you

will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message

in the multifunction display for approximately

five seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically

deactivated if:

Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if

the vehicle is automatically secured with

the electric parking brake.

Ryou are driving slower than 7 mph

(10 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,

or if the vehicle in front is no longer

detected.

RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.

Rthe transmission is in theP,R orN position.

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards

you in order to pull away and the front-

passenger door or one of the rear doors is

open.

Rthe vehicle has skidded.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the

DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the

multifunction display for approximately five

seconds.

In the Assistance menu (Y page 187) of the

on-board computer, you can select the

distance display.

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front

= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable

? Own vehicle

X Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer

(Y page 187).

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes

The following contains descriptions of certain

road and traffic conditions in which you must

be particularly attentive. In such situations,

brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then

deactivated.


Cornering, going into and coming out of a

bend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect

vehicles when cornering is limited. Your

vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

traveling on a different line. The distance to

the vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the

vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this

vehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the

vehicle in front on the edge of the road,

because of its narrow width. The distance to

the vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for

obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for

example, the detected vehicle turns a corner

and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,

DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that

are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating

DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with

crossing traffic, for example, could cause

your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

HOLD function


G WARNING

When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away

despite being braked by the HOLD function if:

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.

Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected



the HOLD function and secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes

automatically in certain situations. To

prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate

DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in

the following or other similar situations:

Rwhen towing the vehicle

Rin the car wash

Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 161).

General notes

The HOLD function can assist the driver in the

following situations:

Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopes

Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes

Rwhen waiting in traffic

The vehicle is kept stationary without the

driver having to depress the brake pedal.

The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD

function deactivated when you depress the

accelerator pedal to pull away.


You can activate the HOLD function if:

Rthe vehicle is stationary.

Rthe engine is running or if it has been



Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastened.

Rthe electric parking brake is released.

Rthe transmission position D, R or N is

engaged while driving a vehicle with an

automatic transmission.

RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.


Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions

are met.

X Depress the brake pedal.

X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until: appears in the multifunction

display.

The HOLD function is activated. You can

release the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,

wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

The HOLD function is deactivated

automatically if:

Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic

transmission: only when the transmission

is in position D or R.

Rthe transmission is in positionP on vehicles

with automatic transmission.

Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a

certain amount of pressure until:

disappears from the multifunction display.

Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric

parking brake.

Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the service

brake.

The electric parking brake automatically

secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is

activated and:

Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is



Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

If amalfunction occurs, then the transmission

may be shifted into position P automatically.

PARKTRONIC


PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a

replacement for your attention to your

immediate surroundings. You are always

responsible for safe maneuvering, parking

and exiting a parking space. When

maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a

parking space, make sure that there are no

persons, animals or objects in the area in

which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such

as flower pots or trailer drawbars.

PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects

when they are in the immediate vicinity of

the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle

or the objects.

The sensorsmay not detect snow and other

objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic

car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a

truck or a pneumatic drill could cause

PARKTRONIC to malfunction.

PARKTRONICmay not function correctly on

uneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with

ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and

audibly the distance between your vehicle

and an object.

Driving systems 161

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when

you:

Rswitch on the ignition

Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N

Rrelease the electric parking brake

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above

11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your

vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper

and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes

PARKTRONIC does not take objects into

consideration that are:

Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,

animals or objects

Rabove the detection range, e.g.

overhanging loads, truck overhangs or

loading ramps.

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,

left-hand side

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and

slush. Otherwise, they may not function

correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking

care not to scratch or damage them

(Y page 269).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.

100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.

60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48in (approx.

120cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.

80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a

warning tone sounds. If the distance falls

below the minimum, the distance may no

longer be shown.

Warning displays

The warning displays show the distance

between the sensors and the obstacle. The

warning display for the front area is located


on the dashboard above the center air vents.

The warning display for the rear area is

located on the headliner in the rear

compartment.

Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle

= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of the

vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red

segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if

yellow segments showing operational

readiness= light up.

The selected transmission position and the

direction in which the vehicle is rolling

determine which warning display is active

when the engine is running.

Transmission

position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle

is rolling

backwards

Rear and front areas

activated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the

vehicle's distance from the obstacle.

From the:

Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone for

approximately two seconds.

Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately two

seconds. This indicates that you have now

reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp

; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC is

deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2

in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments

in the PARKTRONIC

warning displays are lit.

You also hear a warning

tone for approximately

two seconds.

PARKTRONIC is

deactivated after

approximately

20 seconds, and the

indicator lamp in the

PARKTRONIC button

lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.

X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified


Only the red segments

in the PARKTRONIC

warning displays are lit.

PARKTRONIC is

deactivated after

approximately

20seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.

X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 269).

X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or

ultrasound waves.

X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist


Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not

a replacement for your attention to your


responsible for safe maneuvering, parking

and exiting a parking space. When

maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a

parking lot, make sure that there are no

persons, animals or objects in the area in

which you are maneuvering.

G WARNING

The vehicle swings out when parking and in

doing so could cross into the opposite lane.

This could result in a collision with another

road user. There is a risk of an accident.

Pay attention to other road users when

parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or

cancel the Active Parking Assist parking

procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at

a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage

the wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate

parking spaces which are not suitable for

parking, for example:

Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited

Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits

Ron unsuitable surfaces


Parking tips:

Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking

space as close as possible.

Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown

or partially occupied by trailer drawbars

might be identified incorrectly or not at all.

Rsnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parking

space being measured inaccurately.

Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC

(Y page 162) warning messages during the

parking procedure.

Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure

to correct it at any time. Active Parking

Assist will then be canceled.

Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you should not use

Active Parking Assist.

Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snow

chains are installed.

Rmake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct. This has a direct influence

on the parking characteristics of the

vehicle.

Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependent

on various factors. These include the

position and shape of the vehicles parked

in front and behind it and the conditions of

the location. In some cases, Active Parking

Assist may guide you too far into a parking

space, or not far enough into it. In some

cases, it may also lead you across or onto

the curb. If necessary, you should abort the

parking procedure with Active Parking

Assist.

Ryou can also engage forward gear

prematurely. The vehicle redirects and

does not drive as far into the parking space.

Should the gear change occur too soon to

achieve a sensible parking position, the

parking procedure will be aborted.

General notes

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking

aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to

measure the road on both sides of the vehicle.

A suitable parking space is indicated by the

parking symbol. Active steering intervention

can assist you during parking.

You may also use PARKTRONIC

(Y page 161). When PARKTRONIC is switched

off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel

Rthat are on straight roads, not bends

Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.

not on the pavement

Detecting a parking space

Objects located above the height range of

Active Parking Assist will not be detected

when the parking space is measured. These

are not taken into account when the parking

procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging

loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods

vehicles. In some circumstances, Active

Parking Assist may therefore guide you into

the parking space too early.

G WARNING

If there are objects above the detection range,

Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.

You may cause a collision as a result. There is

a risk of an accident.

If there are objects above the detection range,

stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist is automatically

activated when driving forwards. The system

is operational at speeds of up to

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in

operation, the system independently locates

and measures parking spaces on both sides

of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below

19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking

symbol as a status indicator in the instrument

cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only

displays parking spaces on the front-

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

passenger side. Parking spaces on the

driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn

signal on the driver's side is activated. To park

on the driver's side, you must leave the

driver's side turn signal switched on. This

must remain switched on until you

acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist

by pressing thea button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

When a parking space has been detected, an

arrow towards the right or the left also

appears.

Example: detected parking space for a vehicle withautomatic transmission

: Detected parking space on the left

; Parking symbol

= Detected parking space on the right

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking

spaces:

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel

Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide

Rthat are at least 39 in (1.0 m) longer than

your vehicle

A parking space is displayed while you are

driving past it, and until you are

approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNING

Active Parking Assist merely aids you by

intervening actively in the steering. If you do

not brake there is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself when

maneuvering and parking.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space

symbol shows the desired parking space in

the instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.

The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:

%message appears in themultifunction

display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the

% button on the multifunction steering

wheel or pull away.

or

X To park using Active Parking Assist:

press thea button on the multifunction

steering wheel.

The Park Assist Active Accelerate

and Brake Observe Surroundings


display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake

at all times. Do not exceed a maximum

speed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h)

when backing up. Otherwise, Active

Parking Assist will be deactivated.

i In tight parking spaces, you will achievethe best parking results by backing up as

far as possible. When doing so, also

observe the PARKTRONIC messages.

X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the

continuous warning tone, if not before.

Maneuvering may be required in tight

parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D

Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in


X Shift the transmission to position D while

the vehicle is stationary.

Active Parking Assist immediately steers in

the other direction.





display.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure to

complete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all

times.



The Park Assist Active Select R

Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in


X Further transmission shifts may be

necessary.

As soon as the parking procedure is

complete, the Park Assist Finished


display. Active Parking Assist is now

deactivated. PARKTRONIC is still available.

X Maneuver if necessary.

X Always observe the warning messages

displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 162).

Exiting a parking space

G WARNING

Active Parking Assist does not monitor street

traffic. In some cases, the vehicle will also

take you onto sections of the oncoming lane

when exiting a parking space.

You are responsible for safety at all times and

must pay attention to any road users

approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if

necessary or cancel Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you with

exiting a parking space if you have parked the

vehicle using Active Parking Assist.

X Start the engine.

X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing

the street.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:

%message appears in themultifunction

display.

X To cancel the procedure: press the

% button on the multifunction steering

wheel or pull away.

or

X To exit a parking space using Active

Parking Assist: press thea button on

the multifunction steering wheel.




display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being

ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed

a maximum speed of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking

space. Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will

be deactivated.



X Shift the transmission to position D or R as

required while the vehicle is stationary.

Active Parking Assist immediately steers in

the other direction.

i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure to

complete before pulling away.

If you back up after activation, the steering

wheel is moved to the straight-ahead

position.

X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being

ready to brake at all times.



X Drive forwards and back up as instructed

by the PARKTRONIC warning displays.

Once you have exited the parking space

completely, the steering wheel is moved to

the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone

and the message Park Assist Finished

appears in the multifunction display. You will

then have to steer and merge into traffic on

your own. PARKTRONIC is still available.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Canceling Active Parking Assist

You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any

time.

X Stop the movement of the multifunction

steering wheel or steer yourself.

Active Parking Assist will be canceled at

once. The Park Assist Canceled


display.

or

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the

center console (Y page 163).

PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active

Parking Assist is immediately canceled.

The Park Assist Canceled message


Active Parking Assist is canceled

automatically if:

Rthe transmission is shifted too early.

Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no

longer possible.

Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph

(10 km/h).

Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The

÷ warning lamp lights up in the

instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol

disappears and the multifunction display

shows the Park Assist Canceled

message.

When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you

must steer again yourself.

Rear view camera


The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not

a replacement for your attention to your


responsible for safe maneuvering and

parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, make

sure that there are no persons, animals or

objects in the area in which you are

maneuvering.

Under the following circumstances, the rear

view camera will not function, or will function

in a limited manner:

Rthe tailgate is open

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog

Rat night or in very dark places

Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

e.g. when driving into a heated garage in

winter

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed

Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In

this event, have the camera position and

setting checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

General notes

Rear view camera: is in the trunk lid handle.

Rear view camera: is an optical parking and

maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show

the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/

COMAND display.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the language

setting. The following are examples of rear

view camera messages in the COMAND

display.


Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera

X To activate:make sure that the SmartKey

is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that in the audio system/

COMAND, the "Activation by R gear"

function is selected; see the separate

operating instructions for the audio

system/COMAND.


Guide lines are used to show the area

behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND

display.

To deactivate: the rear view camera is

deactivated if you:

Rselect transmission position P (vehicles

with automatic transmission)

Rdrive forward ten meters

Rshift the transmission from R to another

position (after 15 seconds)

Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph

(10km/h)

Displays in the Audio/COMAND display

The rear view camera may show a distorted

view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or

not at all. The rear view camera does not show

objects in the following positions:

Rvery close to the rear bumper

Runder the rear bumper

Rin the area immediately above the tailgate

handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:

Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ra slanted post

Use the guidelines only for orientation.

Approach objects no further than the

bottom-most guideline.

Lanes

: White guide line without turning the

steering wheel, vehicle width including

the exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow lane marking tires at current

steering wheel angle, vehicle width to the

outer side of the wheels (dynamic)

= Red guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current

steering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Bumper

Guide lines

? Bumper

A Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the

rear of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line approximately 13 ft

(4 m) away from the rear of the vehicle

C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

D Yellow guide line approximately 3 ft (1 m)

away from the rear of the vehicle

The lanes and guide lines are only displayed

if you have engaged reverse gear.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

The distance specifications only apply to

objects that are at ground level.

Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONICand COMAND

: Front warning display

; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator

= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and

COMAND: when PARKTRONIC is operational

(Y page 161), the additional operational

readiness indicator; appears in the

COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC

warning displays are active or light up, then

the: and= warning displays are also

active or light up correspondingly in the

COMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

X Make sure that the rear view camera is

activated and the "Reverse parking"

function is selected; see the separate

operating instructions for the audio

system/COMAND.

The lane and the guide lines are shown.

Backing up straight into a parking space

without turning the steering wheel

: White lane with steering wheel straight

; Yellow guide line approximately 3 ft (1 m)

away from the rear of the vehicle

= Red guide line at a distance of


rear of the vehicle

X With the help of white lane:, check

whether the vehicle will fit into the parking

space.

X Using the white lane as a guide, carefully

back up until you reach the end position.

Red guide line= is then at the end of the

parking space. The vehicle is almost

parallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle

X Drive past the parking space and bring the

vehicle to a standstill.


Turning the steering wheel

: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in its

current position

; Parking space marking

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the

steering wheel in the direction of the

parking space until the red lane reaches

parking space marking;.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position

and back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned

: Red lane indicating the route the vehicle

will take with the steering wheel in its

current position

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly

in front of the parking space.

Thewhite lane should be as close to parallel

with the parking space marking as

possible.

Driving to the final position

: White lane at current steering wheel angle

; Parking space marking

X Turn the steering wheel to the center

position while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of


rear of the vehicle

; White lane with steering wheel straight

= End of parking space

X Back up carefully until you have reached

the end position.

Red guide line: is then at the end of

parking space=. The vehicle is almost

parallel in the parking space.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Introduction

ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,

monotonous journeys such as on freeways

and interstate highways. It is active in the

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and

112 mph (180 km/h).

If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical

indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in

concentration on the part of the driver, it

suggests you take a break.


ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the

driver. It might not always recognize fatigue

or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to

recognize them at all. The system is not a

substitute for a well-rested and attentive

driver.

ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of

fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking

the following criteria into account:

Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering

characteristics

Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is

restricted and warnings may be delayed or

not occur at all:

Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the

surface is uneven or if there are potholes

Rif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style

with high cornering speeds or high rates of

acceleration

Rif you are predominantly driving slower

than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than

112 mph (180 km/h)

Rif you are currently using COMAND or

making a telephone call with it

Rif the time has been set incorrectly

Rin active driving situations, such as when

you change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in the

multifunction display

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-

board computer (Y page 188).

Symbol: appears in the multifunction

display.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not

warn you until at least 20 minutes after

your journey has begun. You then hear an

intermittent warning tone twice and the

Attention Assist: Drowsiness

Detected message appears in the


X If necessary, take a break.

X Press thea button to confirm the

message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good

time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you

do not take a break, you will be warned again

after 15 minutes at the earliest. The

precondition for this is that

ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical

indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in

concentration.

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you

continue your journey and starts assessing

your tiredness again if:

Ryou switch off the engine.

Ryou take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or

to take a break.


Lane Tracking package

General notes

The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind

Spot Assist (Y page 173) and Lane Keeping

Assist (Y page 174).

Blind Spot Assist


G WARNING

Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot area

Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more than 6.8 mph

(11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give

warnings in such situations. There is a risk of

an accident.

Always observe the traffic conditions

carefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is merely an aid. It may fail

to detect some vehicles and is no substitute

for attentive driving.

i USA only:

This device has been approved by the FCC

as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar

sensor is intended for use in an automotive

radar system only. Removal, tampering, or

altering of the device will void any

warranties, and is not permitted by the

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in

any non-approved way.


device could void the user’s authority to


General notes

Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system

to monitor the areas on both sides of your

vehicle. It supports you from a speed of

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning

display in the exterior mirrors draws your

attention to vehicles detected in the

monitored area. If you then switch on the

corresponding turn signal to change lane, you

will also receive an optical and audible

collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot

Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper.

For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when

driving, the radar sensor system must be

activated (Y page 192) and operational.

Monitoring range of the sensors


be impaired if:

Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors.

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain or snow.


motorbike or bicycle.

Rthe road has very wide lanes.

Rthe road has narrow lanes.

Ryou are not driving in themiddle of the lane.

Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders.

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not

indicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to

10 ft (3.0m) behind your vehicle and directly

next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar

sensors in the rear bumper.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the

lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may

be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not

driving in the middle of their lane. This may

be the case if the vehicles are driving on the

inner side of their lane.

Due to the nature of the system:

Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similar

solid lane borders.

Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside particularly long vehicles, for

example trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are

integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.

Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt,

ice or slush around the sensors. The rear

sensors must not be covered, for example by

bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following

a severe impact or in the event of damage to

the bumpers, have the function of the radar

sensors checked at a qualified specialist

workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise

not work properly.

Indicator and warning display

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below

approximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in

the monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator

lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up

yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).

At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the

indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist

is operational.

If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring

range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above

20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the

corresponding side lights up red. Thiswarning

is always emitted when a vehicle enters the

blind spot monitoring range from behind or

from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,

the warning only occurs if the difference in

speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse

gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot

Assist is no longer active.

The brightness of the indicator/warning

lamps is adjusted automatically according to

the ambient light.

Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range

of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the

corresponding turn signal, a double warning

tone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If

the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles

are indicated by the flashing of red warning

lamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that the radar sensor system

(Y page 192) and Blind Spot Assist

(Y page 188) are activated in the on-board

computer.


ignition lock.

Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors

light up red for approximately

1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in

front of your vehicle by means of a camera at

the top of thewindshield. LaneKeepingAssist

detects lane markings on the road and warns

you before you leave your lane

unintentionally.


: Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select km on the on-board computer in

the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:

function (Y page 189), Lane Keeping Assist

is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the

miles display unit is selected, the assistance

range begins at 40 mph.


G WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly

recognize lane markings.

In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:

Rgive an unnecessary warning

Rnot give a warning


Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and stay in lane, in particular if

warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not

return the vehicle to the original lane. There


You should always steer, brake or accelerate

yourself, in particular if warned by Lane

Keeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane

Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of

an accident nor override the laws of physics.

Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account

the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane

Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are


front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

time and for staying in lane.

Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your

vehicle in its lane.

The system may be impaired or may not

function if:

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or due

to snow, rain, fog or spray

Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road

surface is wet)

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged

or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the

vicinity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lane

markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road

construction work

Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lanemarkings thus cannot be

detected

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another or

merge

Rthe road is narrow and winding

Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

A warning may be given if a front wheel

passes over a lane marking. It will warn you

by means of intermittent vibration in the

steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using

the on-board computer; to do so, select

Standard or Adaptive(Y page 188).

Symbol: appears in the multifunction

display.

If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)

and lane markings are detected,

symbol: is highlighted. Lane Keeping

Assist is ready for use.

When Standard is selected, no warning

vibration occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certain

period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, no warning

vibration occurs if:

Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certain

period of time.

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.

Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.

Ryou brake hard.

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lane quickly.

Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when

necessary and in good time if you cross the

lane marking, the system recognizes certain

conditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:

Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.

Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

freeway.

Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rthe road has narrow lanes.

Ryou cut the corner on a bend.




Displays and operation .................... 178

Menus and submenus ...................... 182

Display messages ............................. 193

Warning and indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster ............................ 218

177

On-boardcomputeranddisplays

Useful information











G WARNING

The driver's concentration must always be

directed primarily at road traffic.

For your safety and the safety of others,

selecting features through the multifunction

steering wheel should only be done by the

driver when traffic and road conditions permit

it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers

a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14m) per

second.

G WARNING

No messages will be displayed if either the

instrument cluster or the multifunction

display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see

information about your driving conditions,

such as

Rspeed

Routside temperature

Rwarning/indicator lamps

Rmalfunction/warning messages

Rfailure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If youmust continue to drive, do sowith added

caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNING

Malfunction and warning messages are only

indicated for certain systems and are

intentionally not very detailed. The

malfunction and warning messages are

simply a reminder with respect to the

operation of certain systems. They do not

replace the owner's and/or driver's

responsibility to maintain the vehicle's

operating safety. Have all required

maintenance and safety checks performed on

the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center to address the

malfunction and warning messages.

G WARNING

All categories of messages contain important

information which should be taken note of

and, where a malfunction is indicated,

addressed as soon as possible at an


Failure to repair the condition noted may

cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property

damage or personal injury.

You will find an illustration of the instrument

cluster in the "At a glance" section

(Y page 27).

Displays and operation

Instrument lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the

displays and the controls in the vehicle

interior can be adjusted using the brightness

control knob.

The brightness control knob is located on the

bottom left of the instrument cluster

(Y page 27).

178 Displays and operationOn-boardcomputeranddisplays

X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise

or counter-clockwise.

If the light switch is set toÃ,T or

L, the brightness is dependent upon

the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of


In daylight, the displays in the instrument

cluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNING

Driving when your engine is overheated can

cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into

the engine compartment to catch fire. You

could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause

serious burnswhich can occur just by opening

the engine hood. Stay away from the engine

if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from

other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the

vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.

If the coolant temperature is over

248‡(120†), do not continue driving. The

engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the

instrument cluster on the right-hand side.

Under normal operating conditions and with

the specified coolant level, the coolant

temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the

engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

G WARNING

The outside temperature indicator is not

designed to serve as an ice-warning device

and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the

freezing point do not guarantee that the road

surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,

especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature display is in the


Changes in the outside temperature are

displayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate

which speed range is available.

RCruise control activated (Y page 150):

The segments light up from the stored

speed to the maximum speed.

RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 152):

One or two segments in the set speed

range light up.

RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of the

vehicle in front and the stored speed light

up.

Displays and operation 179


Z

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display

; To switch on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions

= Right control panel

? Left control panel

A Back button

X To activate the on-board computer: turn

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition

lock.

You can control the multifunction display and

the settings in the on-board computer using

the buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:

RScrolls in lists

RSelects a submenu or function

RIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track or

a video scene

RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book and

selects a name or telephone

number

9

:

Press and hold:

RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selects

an audio track or a video scene

using rapid scrolling

RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

starts rapid scrolling through the

phone book

a RConfirms a selection/display

message

RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone book

and starts dialing the selected

number

RIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at the

desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits phone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a call

RSwitches to the redial memory

180 Displays and operationOn-boardcomputeranddisplays

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:

RBack

RSwitches off the Voice Control

System; see the separate

operating instructions

RHides display messages/calls

up the last Trip menu function

used

RExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:

RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Multifunction display

: Time

; Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 190)

= Description field

? Menu bar

A Drive program (Y page 133)

B Transmission position (Y page 133)

X To show menu bar?: press the=

or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.

Text field= shows the selected menu or

submenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND; see the separate

operating instructions.

The following messages may appear in the

multifunction display:

XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 164)

CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 150)

è Rear window wiper (Y page 110)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 100)

À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 171)

Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 174)

ë HOLD function (Y page 160)

Ä Distance warning function

(Y page 228)

Displays and operation 181


Z

Menus and submenus

Menu overview

Operating the on-board computer (Y page 180).

Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:

RTrip menu (Y page 182)

RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 184)

RAudio menu (Y page 185)

RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 186)

RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 187)

RServ. menu (Y page 189)

RSett. menu (Y page 189)

The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles with

COMAND. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with

COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the

steering wheel until the Trip menu with

trip odometer: and odometer; is

shown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "From

Reset"

Example: trip computer "From Start"

: Distance

; Time

= Average speed

? Average fuel consumption

X Press the= or; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select

From Start or From Reset.

The values in the From Start submenu are

calculated from the start of a journey whilst

the values in the From Reset submenu are

calculated from the last time the submenu

was reset (Y page 183).

The From Start trip computer is

automatically reset when:

RThe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.

R999 hours have been exceeded.

R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

The From Reset trip computer is

automatically reset if the value exceeds

9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

182 Menus and submenusOn-boardcomputeranddisplays

ECO display

Example: ECO display




ECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer

than four hours, the ECO display will be

automatically reset.

Further information on the ECO display

(Y page 145).

Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption

: Approximate range

; Current fuel consumption




current fuel consumption; and

approximate range:.

Approximate range: is calculated

according to current driving style and the

amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a

small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the

display shows a vehicle being refueledCinstead of range:.

Digital speedometer

: Digital speedometer




digital speedometer:.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

You can reset the values of the following

functions:

RTrip odometer

R"From Start" trip computer

R"From Reset" trip computer

RECO display



X Press the9 or: button to select the

function that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.

X Press the: button to select Yes and

press thea button to confirm.

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer

"From start" are likewise reset. When you

reset the values in the trip computer "From

start", the values in the "ECO display"are

likewise reset.

Menus and submenus 183


Z

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions

X Switch on Audio 20 with Becker® MAP

PILOT or COMAND (see the separate

operating instructions).


steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

In the Navi menu, the multifunction display

shows navigation instructions. For more

information, see the separate operating

instructions.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel

; Current street

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination

; Distance to the next change of direction

= Current street

? Symbol "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without a

lane recommendation

: Road into which the change of direction

leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

= Symbol for change of direction

When a change of direction has been

announced, you will see visual distance

display; next to the symbol for change of

direction=. This shortens from the bottom

to the top of the display as you approach the

point of the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with a

lane recommendation

: Road into which the change of direction

leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual

distance display

= Lane recommendation

? New lane during a change of direction

A Uninterrupted lane

B Symbol for change of direction

On multilane roads, the system can display

lane recommendation= for the next change

of direction. During the change of direction,

additional lanes may be displayed.

Lane recommendations are only displayed if

the relevant data is available on the digital

map.


Other status indicators of the

navigation system

RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

RNew Route... or Calculating Route:

calculating a new route

ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle

position is outside the area of the digital

map (off-map position).

RNo Route: no route could be calculated to

the selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband

; Station frequency with memory position

i The memory position is only displayedalong with station; if this has been

stored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and select Radio; see the separate



steering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly press

the9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station

list: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:

X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separate


i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.

For more information on satellite radio

operation, see the separate operating

instructions.

Operating audio player or audio media

CD changer display (example)

: Current CD in the CD changer

; Current title

Audio data from various audio devices or

media can be played, depending on the

equipment installed in the vehicle.

X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3

mode; see the separate operating

instructions.



X To select the next/previous track:

briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the

9 or: button until desired

track; has been reached.

If you press and hold9 or:, the

rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all

audio drives or data carriers support this

function.

If track information is stored on the audio

device or medium, the multifunction display

will show the number and title of the track.

The current track does not appear in audio



Z

AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external

audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

DVD changer display (example)

: Current DVD in the DVD changer

; Current scene

X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

see the separate operating instructions.



X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the

9 or: button until desired

scene; has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING

The driver's attention to the roadmust always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For

your safety and the safety of others, we

recommend that you pull over to a safe

location and stop before placing or taking a

telephone call. If you choose to use the

telephonewhile driving, please use the hands-

free device and only use the telephone when

road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers

a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)

every second.

X Switch on your mobile phone and audio

system or COMAND, see the separate


X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the

audio system or COMAND; see the

separate operating instructions.


steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display

messages in the multifunction display:

RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found a

network and is ready to receive.

RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searching

for a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call

X Press the6 button on the steering

wheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in the

Tel menu, a display message appears in the


You can accept a call even if you are not in

the Tel menu.

Rejecting or ending a call

X Press the~ button on the steering

wheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are not

in the Tel menu.


Dialing a number from the phone book



X Press the9,: ora button to

switch to the phone book.


desired name.

To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the

9 or: button for longer than one

second.

Rapid scrolling stops when you release the

button or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored

for a name: press the6 ora button

to start dialing.

or

X If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.


number you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start

dialing.

or

X If you do not want to make a call: press

the~ or% button.

Redialing

The on-board computer saves the last names

or numbers dialed in the redial memory.



X Press the6 button to switch to the

redial memory.


desired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start

dialing.

or

X If you do not want to make a call: press

the~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist menu, you have the

following options:

Rshow the distance display

Ractivate/deactivate ESP®

Ractivate/deactivate the distance warning

function

Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST

Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist

Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist

Showing the distance display


steering wheel to select the DriveAssist

menu.


Distance Display.


The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display

appears in the multifunction display

(Y page 155).

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Further information about ESP®(Y page 63).

X Start the engine.



menu.


ESP.




Z

X To deactivate: pressa again.

Theå warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.

X To activate: pressa again.

Theå warning lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out.

Switching the distance warning

function on and off



menu.

X Press9 or: to select Dist.

Warning.


The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When the distance warning function is

activated, the multifunction display shows

theÄ symbol if the HOLD function is not

activated (Y page 160).

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if

PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving

at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), thej

Active ParkingAssist symbol is shown instead

of theÄ symbol (Y page 164).

Further information on the distance warning

function (Y page 60).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION

ASSIST



menu.


Attention Asst..




When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 171) is

activated, theÀ symbol appears in the

multifunction display when the ignition is on.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist



menu.


Blind Spot Asst..




For further information about Blind Spot

Assist, see (Y page 173).

When the Blind Spot Assist: Sensors

Deactivated message is shown, the radar

sensors are deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system

(Y page 192).

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist



menu.


Lane Keep. Asst..



X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to set Off,

Standard or Adaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 174) is

activated and the ignition is switched on, the

Ã symbol appears in the multifunction

display.


Service menu

In the Serv. menu, you have the following

options:

Rcall up display messages in the message

memory (Y page 193)

Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 299)

Rcall up when a service is due

(Y page 264)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Sett. menu, you have the following

options:

Rchange the instrument cluster settings

Rchange the light settings

Rchange the vehicle settings

Rchange the convenience settings

Rrestore the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement for

distance

You can determine whether the multifunction

display shows some messages in miles or

kilometers.


steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select the

Instr. Cluster submenu.



Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:

function.

You will see the selected setting: km or

miles.


The selected unit of measurement for

distance applies to:

Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu

Rthe odometer and the trip odometer

Rthe trip computer

Rthe current consumption and the range

Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi

menu

Rcruise control

RDISTRONIC PLUS

RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer on

or off

Only vehicles with manual transmission have

this function.








Z


Speedometer [mph]: function.

You will see the selected setting: On or

Off.


i Speed is displayed in mph.

The Speedometer [mph] function allows you

to choose whether the status area in the

multifunction display always shows the speed

in mph instead of the outside temperature.

Selecting the permanent display function

You can determine whether the multifunction

display permanently shows your speed or the

outside temperature.







Permanent Display: function.

You will see the selected setting Outside

Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]

(USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada).


i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph(Canada).

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/

off

The Daytime Running Lights: function

can only be set when the engine is switched

off.




Lights submenu.



Daytime Running Lights function.

You will see the selected setting: Enabled

or Disabled.


Further information on daytime running

lamps (Y page 97).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/

off




Lights submenu.



Adaptive Highbeam Assist: function.


or Disabled.


For further information about Adaptive

Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 100).

Activating/deactivating surround

lighting and exterior lighting delayed

switch-off

If you have activated the Locator

Lighting: function and the light switch is set

toÃ, the following functions are activated

when it is dark:

Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking

with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,

the surround lighting is switched off and

automatic headlamp mode is activated

(Y page 97).

Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for

60 seconds after the engine is switched off.

If you close all the doors and the tailgate,

the exterior lighting goes off after

15 seconds.





Lights submenu.



Locator Lighting function.


or Disabled.


Deactivating delayed switch-off of the

exterior lighting temporarily:

X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.


ignition lock.

The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is

deactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is

reactivated the next time you start the

engine.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayed

switch-off exterior lighting are on, the

following light up:

RParking lamps

RFront fog lamps

RLow-beam headlamps

RDaytime running lamps

RSide marker lamps

RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior

lighting delayed switch-off

If you activate the Interior Lighting

Delay: function, the interior lighting remains

on for 20 seconds after you remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.




Lights submenu.



Interior Lighting Delay: function.


or Disabled.


Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automatic

door locking mechanism




Vehicle submenu.



Automatic Door Lock: function.


or Disabled.


If you select the Automatic Door Lock:

function, the vehicle is centrally locked above

a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).

i For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 74).

Activating/deactivating the acoustic

locking verification signal

If you switch on the Acoustic Lock

Feedback: function, an acoustic signal

sounds when you lock the vehicle.




Vehicle submenu.



Acoustic Lock Feedback: function.


or Disabled.




Z

Activating/deactivating the radar sensor

system


steering wheel to select the Settings

menu.


Vehicle submenu.



Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.


or Disabled.


If the radar sensor system is switched off,

Blind Spot Assist is deactivated

(Y page 173).

Convenience

Switching the fold-in mirrors when

locking feature on/off

This function is only available on vehicles with

the memory function (Y page 93).




Convenience submenu.



Fold Mirrors in when Locking:

function.


or Disabled.


If you switch on the Fold Mirrors in when

Locking: function, the exterior mirrors fold

in when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock the

vehicle and then open the driver's or front-

passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out

again.

If you have switched the function on and you

fold the exterior mirrors in using the button

on the door (Y page 91), they will not fold out

automatically. The exterior mirrors can then

only be folded out using the button on the

door.

Restoring the factory settings




Factory Setting submenu.


The Reset All Settings? message

appears.

X Press the: or9 button to select

No or Yes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

If you have selected Yes, the multifunction

display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running

Lights: function in the Lights submenu is

only reset when the vehicle is stationary.


Display messages

General notes

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's

Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.

Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in

this Operator's Manual.

Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-

priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been

rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function

(Y page 160) and parking (Y page 141).

Hiding display messages

X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority

display messages cannot be hidden.

The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the

messages have been remedied.

Message memory

The on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can

call up the display messages:

X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.


X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 193


Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and

hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.

In addition, the÷,å and! warning lamps light up in


ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

Possible causes are:

RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.

RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the

functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you

brake hard, for example.

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely

affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation

can increase.

If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,

making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph

(20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned

above are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Drive on carefully.


!÷Inoperative See

Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start

assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.


In addition, theJ,÷,å and! warning lamps light

up in the instrument cluster.


G WARNING




194 Display messagesOn-boardcomputeranddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions



can increase.




X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are

temporarily unavailable.


In addition, the÷ andå warning lamps light up in the

instrument cluster.


The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNING


functions listed above.

The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus

increase.





(20 km/h).

If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned

above are available again.






Z


÷Inoperative See

Operator's Manual


unavailable due to a malfunction.


In addition, the÷ andå warning lamps light up in the

instrument cluster.


G WARNING




increase.





T!÷Inoperative See

Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due

to a malfunction.


In addition, the÷,å and! warning lamps light up in

the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.


G WARNING


functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore

lock if you brake hard, for example.



can increase.







!Please Release

Parking Brake

The red! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.

A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is

not fulfilled (Y page 142).

You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.

X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The red! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.

You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking

brake (Y page 142).

!Parking Brake See

Operator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

X Switch the ignition off.

X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.

X Shift the transmission to P.


The yellow! warning lamp and the red! indicator lamp

are lit.


To release:

X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.


or

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 142).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:

X Do not drive on.




Z


The red! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning

lamp is lit.


To release:



To apply:


X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red! indicator lamp continues to flash:

X Do not drive on.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 313).


X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.


The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The red! indicator

lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake

has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.




If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:



If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 142).



The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red! indicator lamp

flashes.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to

apply the electric parking brake manually.

X Shift the transmission to P as the electric parking brake is not

being applied automatically.




!Parking Brake

Inoperative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The red! indicator

lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake

has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of

overvoltage or undervoltage.

X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by

charging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:


X Engage or release the electric parking brake.



The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.

The red! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning

lamp is lit.

It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.



!Turn On the

Ignition to

Release the

Parking Brake

The red! indicator lamp is lit.

You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the

ignition was switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.



Z


JCheck Brake Fluid

Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the redJ warning lamp lights up in the instrument

cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving

under any circumstances.


X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the

malfunction.


#Check Brake Pad

Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.


Gmbrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are

malfunctioning.

X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified




PRE-SAFE

Functions

Currently Limited

See Operator's

Manual

Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes

are:

Rthe radar sensor system cover in the radiator grill is dirty.

Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.

Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio

stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.

Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.

Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear:


attention to road and traffic conditions.


X Clean the radar sensor cover in the radiator grill (Y page 269).

X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE

Functions Limited

See Operator's

Manual

Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning signal may

also have failed.


6SRS Malfunction

Service Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System). The6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument

cluster.

G WARNING

The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be

triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not

be triggered.

There is an increased risk of injury.


Further information on occupant safety (Y page 36).



Z


6Front Left

Malfunction

Service Required

or Front Right

Malfunction

Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING



be triggered.



6Rear Left

Malfunction

Service Required

or Rear Right

Malfunction

Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING



be triggered.



6Rear Center

Malfunction

Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The6warning lamp

also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING



be triggered.



6Left Side Curtain

Airbag Malfunction

Service Required

or Right Side

Curtain Airbag

Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag. The6 warning lamp also lights up in the

instrument cluster.

G WARNING

The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered

unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be

triggered.



Lights

i Display messages about LEDs:


This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.


bCheck Left

Cornering Light or

Check Right

Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Low

Beam or Check

Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Rear Left

Turn Signal or

Check Rear Right

Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Front Left

Turn Signal or

Check Front Right

Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Mirror

Turn Signal or

Check Right Mirror

Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Center Brake

Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.


(Y page 102).

or




Z


bCheck Left Brake

Lamp or Check

Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Tail

and Brake Lamps or

Check Right Tail

and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left High

Beam or Check

Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Fog

Lamp or Check

Right Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Front Left

Parking Lamp or

Check Front Right

Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or




bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Tail

Lamp or Check

Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Front Left

Sidemarker Lamp or

Check Front Right

Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Rear Left

Sidemarker Lamp or

Check Rear Right

Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.


(Y page 102).

or


bCheck Left Daytime

Running Light or

Check Right

Daytime Running

Light

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.


(Y page 102).

or


bActive Headlamps

Inoperative

The active light function is defective.


bMalfunction See

Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.


bAuto Lamp Function

Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.




Z


bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A

warning tone also sounds.


Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.


Adaptive Highbeam

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

inoperative. Possible causes are:

Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.

Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is

displayed.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine


+Check Coolant

Level See

Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

(Y page 263).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures under 248‡ (120†), drive to the next


X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.



?Coolant Too Hot

Stop Vehicle Turn

Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some

fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to

catch fire.

Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns

which can occur just by opening the hood.


X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.


X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until


X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out

and the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †).

Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.

X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist


Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant

level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).



Z


# The battery is not being charged.



Ra defective alternator

Ra torn poly-V-belt

Ra malfunction in the electronics



X Open the hood.

X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.


If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:


4Check Engine Oil

At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.


X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 261).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 262).

X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any


æFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.



ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

æGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed

correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:


Driving systems


ÀAttention Assist:

Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone

also sounds.

X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get

enough rest.

ÀAttention Assist

Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.


ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.


X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 160).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.


X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 160).

Radar Sensors

Deactivated See

Operator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.

X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 192).



Z


Lane Keeping

Assist Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.


Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.

Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.

Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.


message disappears.

Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.





X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping

Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.


Blind Spot Assist

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:

Rthe sensors are dirty.


Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.




The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior

mirrors.


message disappears.

Blind Spot Assist is operational again.





X Clean the sensors (Y page 269).




Blind Spot Assist

Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior

mirrors.


Park Assist

Canceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been

fastened.

X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the

driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.

X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the

multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 164).

Park Assist

Inoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking

maneuvers.

Active Parking Assist will become available again after

approximately ten minutes (Y page 164).



X Switch off and restart the engine.



PARKTRONIC is defective.


DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 152). If it was

deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now

Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been

temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 152).



Z


DISTRONIC PLUS

Currently

Unavailable See

Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:


Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.




Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.

Rthe on-board voltage is too low.



message disappears.

DISTRONIC is operational again.





X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 269).


DISTRONIC PLUS

Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may also

have failed.



DISTRONIC PLUS

Passive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no

longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS

--- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 154).



Cruise Control

Inoperative

Cruise control is defective.



Cruise Control

--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.

You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for

example.

X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

store the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 150).



Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check

Tire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant

loss in pressure.


G WARNING

With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the

following hazards:

Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.

Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.


X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.


X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 275).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire

pressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire

pressure is correct (Y page 299).

Check Tire Pressure

Then Restart Run

Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display

message and has not been restarted since.

X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 299).

Run Flat Indicator

Inoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.



Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'

to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in

position R or D.

X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery

Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer

being charged.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.

X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before

you switch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Depress Brake to

Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in

position N without depressing the brake pedal.


To Deselect P or

N,

Depress Brake and

Start Engine

You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D

without starting the engine.

X Start the engine.


i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P tothe desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then

can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the

brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the

parking lock remains engaged.

i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you

can only shift out of position P into another transmission

position when the engine is running.

Apply Brake to

Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to

position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.


Transmission Not

in P

Risk of Vehicle

Rolling Away

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N

or D.






Z


Service Required

Do Not Shift Gears

Visit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.


If transmission position D is selected:

X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the

transmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'

when Vehicle is

Stationary

The vehicle is moving.




Reversing Not

Possible Service

Required

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back

up.


Transmission

Malfunction

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.


Transmission

Malfunction Stop

The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.





Stop Vehicle Shift

to P Leave Engine

Running

The automatic transmission has overheated.


The automatic transmission is available again when the display

message goes out.





X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the

display message has disappeared.



A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING

When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle

interior if the tailgate is open.

There is a risk of poisoning.

X Close the tailgate.

? The hood is open.

G WARNING

The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.





X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.

ÐPower Steering

Malfunction See

Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.


G WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.


X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified


X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.

X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol


¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped

below the minimum.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 263).



Z


Wiper

Malfunctioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.


Hazard Warning

Flashers

Malfunctioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.


SmartKey


+Key Does Not

Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.

+Take Your Key from

Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.

+Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.


Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts


ü

After starting the

engine, the red seat

belt warning lamp lights

up for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger

to fasten their seat belts.

X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).

ü

After starting the

engine, the red seat

belt warning lamp lights

up. In addition, a

warning tone sounds

for up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.


The warning tone ceases.

218 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn-boardcomputeranddisplays


ü

The red seat belt

warning lamp lights up

after the engine starts,

as soon as the driver's

or the front-passenger

door is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.


The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat belt

warning lamp flashes

and an intermittent

audible warning

sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In

addition, you are driving faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or you have

briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).


The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone

ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are

driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven

faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).

X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone

ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 219


Z

Safety systems


J

The red brake system

warning lamp comes on

while the engine is

running. Awarning tone

also sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING

The braking effect may be impaired.



attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving

under any circumstances.


X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the

malfunction.


X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

!

The yellowABSwarning

lamp is lit while the

engine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.

BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and

hill start assist, for example, are therefore also deactivated.


G WARNING






can increase.




display.



If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other

systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic

transmission, will not be available.



!



engine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION

ASSIST, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution),

PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example,

are therefore also deactivated.


RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.

RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.


G WARNING






can increase.





(20 km/h).

The functions mentioned above are available again when the

warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:


display.





Z


!



engine is running. A

warning tone also

sounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION

PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and

hill-start assist are also not available, for example.


G WARNING






can increase.




display.



J÷å!

The red brake warning

lamp, the yellow ESP®

and ESP® OFF warning

lamps and the yellow

ABS warning lamp are

lit while the engine is

running.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION

PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and

hill-start assist, for example, are not available either.


G WARNING






can increase.




display.





÷

The yellow ESP®


while the vehicle is in

motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.

Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 63).

å

The yellow ESP® OFF

warning lamp is lit while

the engine is running.

ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will not

stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.


X Reactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 63).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å

The yellow ESP® and

ESP® OFF warning

lamps are lit while the

engine is running.

ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, PRE-SAFE®, the

HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a

malfunction.


G WARNING




increase.




display.





Z


÷å

The yellow ESP® and

ESP® OFF warning

lamps are lit while the

engine is running.


temporarily unavailable.



Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNING




increase.





(20 km/h).

The functions mentioned above are available again when the

warning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:


display.





!

The red indicator lamp

for the electric parking

brake flashes or lights

up and/or the yellow

warning lamp for the

electric parking brake

lights up.

X Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

6

The red SRS warning


engine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System).

G WARNING



be triggered.



X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 37).



Z

Engine


;

The yellow Check

Engine warning lamp

lights up while the

engine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:

Rin the engine management

Rin the fuel injection system

Rin the exhaust system

Rin the ignition system

Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may

be running in emergency mode.

X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified


i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarning

lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal

requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations

apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

æ

The yellow reserve fuel


while the engine is

running.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

æ

The yellow reserve fuel


while the engine is

running.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed

correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

?

The red coolant


while the engine is

running and the coolant

temperature gage is at

the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is

defective.

The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a

risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.


paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue

driving under any circumstances.





?

The red coolant


while the engine is

running.

The coolant level is too low.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator

may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be

malfunctioning.

The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled

sufficiently.


display.






X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 263). Observe

the warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.



X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is

under 248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.



?

The red coolant


while the engine is

running. Awarning tone

also sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The

airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level

may be too low.

G WARNING

The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.

Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some

fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to

catch fire.

Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns

which can occur just by opening the hood.



display.






Z




X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 263). Observe

the warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.



X At coolant temperatures under 248‡ (120†), drive to the next




Driving systems


·

The red distance


while the vehicle is in

motion. A warning tone

also sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line

of travel at too high a speed.

X Be prepared to brake immediately.

X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.



Loading guidelines ............................ 230

Stowage areas .................................. 230

Features ............................................. 241

229

Stowageandfeatures

Useful information










Loading guidelines

G WARNING

Always fasten items being carried as securely

as possible using cargo tie-down rings and

fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight

and size of the load.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden

maneuvers, loose itemswill be thrown around

inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to

vehicle occupants unless the items are

securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a collision

or sudden maneuver, exercise care when

transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or

cargo higher than the seat backrests.

Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.

Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may

enter vehicle interior resulting in


The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution of

the load within the vehicle. For this reason,

you should observe the following notes when

transporting a load:

Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the

maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

or the gross axle weight rating of the

vehicle (including occupants). The values

are specified on the vehicle identification

plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.

Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as

possible and as low down in the cargo

compartment as possible.

Rthe loadmust not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.

Ralways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that the

seat backrests are securely locked into

place.

Rhook in the cargo net when loading.

Rthe maximum load capacity of the stowage

well under the cargo compartment floor is

55 lbs (25 kg).

Ralways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.

Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges

for protection.

! Do not position the load on one part of thefolding cargo compartment floor only. The

maximum load capacity of the folding cargo

compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg).

Distribute the weight evenly to avoid

damaging the cargo compartment floor.

Place a solid board under the load if

necessary. Please note that the load on the

cargo compartment floor will be increased

when the load is lashed down.

Stowage areas

Stowage space


G WARNING



storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or

cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the

seat backrests.

230 Stowage areasStowageandfeatures

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help

to prevent stored objects from being thrown

about and injuring vehicle occupants during

Rbraking

Rvehicle maneuvers

Ran accident

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove box

flap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards

until it engages.

i There is a pen holder at the top of theglove box flap.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment

is always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the center

console

X To open: press the marking on cover:.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,there is an open instead of a closed

stowage compartment or an ashtray in the

center console.

Stowage compartment in front of the

armrest (vehicles with automatic

transmission)

X To open: press the marking on cover:.

i You can remove the non-slip mat and theinsert for cleaning. When removing the

insert, you will encounter a small amount

of resistance.

Stowage areas 231

Stowageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: on vehicles with moveable

armrests, make sure that the armrest is in

the rearmost position.

X Press button: and fold the armrest up.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connection

or a Media Interface are installed in the

stowage compartment. A Media Interface

is a universal interface for mobile audio

equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player

(see the separate COMAND Operating

Instructions).

Stowage compartment under the driver's

seat and front-passenger seat

X To open: pull handle: up and fold

cover; forwards.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear center

console

X To open: pull down the top of stowage

compartment: by the edge of the handle.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,theremay be an open stowage space above

the stowage compartment.

Folding table

G WARNING

Keep the folding table closedwhile the vehicle

is in motion. Otherwise, you could be injured

by objects on the table, or by the folding table

itself, in the event of sharp braking, a sudden

change in direction or an accident.

! Do not load the folding table with morethan the maximum permissible load of

4.4 lbs (2 kg).


X To fold out: pull folding table: up in the

direction of the arrow to the desired

position.

X To fold away: push folding table: down

onto the backrest.

Parcel nets

G WARNING

Parcel nets are intended for storing light-

weight items only, such as road maps, mail,

etc.

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or

fragile objects may not be transported in the

parcel nets. In an accident, during hard

braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be

thrown around inside the vehicle and cause

injury to vehicle occupants.

Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods

in the event of an accident.

! The maximum load that may be placed onthe parcel net under the rear shelf is

2.5 kg.

Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger

footwell and on the back of the driver's and

the front-passenger seat.

Folding backrest on the front-

passenger seat

G WARNING

In the event of an accident, sudden braking or

an abrupt change of direction, people sitting

in the back may be endangered by protruding

parts of the folded front-passenger seat if the

backrest of the front-passenger seat is folded

forward. There is an increased risk of injury.

Make sure that there are no people on the

center rear seat or on the rear seat behind the

front-passenger seat, while the front-

passenger seat is folded.

X To fold forward: gently push the backrest

back.

X Pull release handle: and fold the

backrest fully onto the seat cushion until it

engages.

X To fold back: gently push the backrest

down and pull release handle:.

X Fold the seat backrest back until it

engages.

Through-loading facility in the rear

compartment

G WARNING

Do not transport any unsecured items in the

through-loading area.

G WARNING

Do not drive without the armrest locked in

place. You and others could otherwise be

injured by the armrest should it be thrown

around in the event of an accident, strong

braking maneuvers or sudden changes of

direction.

No passengers may sit in the rear center seat

when the armrest has been removed.

Stowage areas 233

Stowageandfeatures

Z

X To open: fold down seat armrest:.

X Pull the cover, which can now be seen,

forwards by the grip until it lies on

armrest:.

X Pull the center head restraint on the rear

bench seat into the uppermost position

(Y page 87).

X Slide locking mechanism= in the

direction of the arrow.

X Swing flap; fully to the side.

Flap; is held open by a magnet.

X To close: swing flap; in the cargo

compartment back until it engages.

X Fold the cover forwards until it engages into

armrest:.

X Fold armrest: up fully if necessary.

Cargo compartment enlargement


G WARNING

When expanding the cargo volume, always

fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so

equipped, always use the cargo net when

transporting cargo.

Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat

backrests must remain properly locked in the

upright position.






Always use the cargo tie-down rings.

G WARNING

Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.

Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may

enter vehicle interior resulting in


! Before folding the backrest in the rearcompartment forwards, make sure that the

rear compartment armrest and the

cupholder are folded in. They may

otherwise be damaged.

Vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS

system

Folding the rear seat backrest forward

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat

backrests can be folded forwards separately

to increase the cargo compartment capacity.


X Fully insert the backrest head restraints

(Y page 87).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

forward if necessary.

X Pull left-hand or right-hand release

handle; of the seat backrest forwards.

Corresponding seat backrest: is

released.

X Fold backrest: forwards.


back if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back



! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seat

backrest back. Otherwise, it could be

damaged.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.

Red lock status indicator; is no longer

visible.

G WARNING

If a red indicator is visible with the seat

backrest up, then the seat backrest is not

properly locked into position.

Always lock seat backrest in its upright

position when rear seat bench is occupied, or

the expanded cargo volume is not in use.

Check for secure locking by pushing and

pulling on the seat backrest.








transporting cargo.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 87).


back if necessary.

Vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS

system

Folding the rear seat backrest forward

The left-hand and right-hand rear seat

backrests can be folded forwards separately

to increase the cargo compartment capacity.

X Fully insert the backrest head restraints

(Y page 87).

X Move the rear seat as far back as possible

(Y page 237).

Stowage areas 235

Stowageandfeatures

Z



X Pull right or left loop; on the backrest in

the direction of the arrow.


released.

X Fold down backrest: fully.


back if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back



! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seat

backrest back. Otherwise, it could be

damaged.

X Swing backrest: back.

X Adjust the backrest to the desired angle by

pulling the loop (Y page 236).

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 87).


back if necessary.

Notes on using the cargo compartment

Load position

Making the best use of your cargo

compartment:

RLoad capacity is increased when

backrest: is set to the load position (90°)

(Y page 236).

RVehicles with a height-adjustable trunk

floor: a level load surface can be obtained

by moving the trunk floor to the upper

position (Y page 240).

RA larger load area can be obtained by

moving the rear bench seat as far forward

as possible (Y page 237).

RThe load area can be lengthened by folding

forward the folding backrest of the front-

passenger seat (Y page 233) and the

corresponding backrest in the rear.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat

backrests

You can set the angle of the seat backrests

to one of 13 detent positions.


X Pull right or left release loop; forwards in

the direction of the arrow.


released.

X Pull backrest: forward in the direction of

the arrow, or push it back and let it engage.

X To ensure that the backrest has engaged,

lean firmly against backrest:.

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position

! When moving the rear seats back, makesure there are no objects in the footwell or

behind the seats. The rear seats and/or the

objects could otherwise be damaged.

X Lift the left or right release handle and slide

the corresponding seat forwards or

backwards.

X Let go of the release handle again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage in

position.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

Observe the following notes on securing

loads:

Rsecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.

Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure

a load, as these are only intended as an

anti-slip protection for light loads.

Rdo not route tie-downs across sharp edges

or corners.

Rpad sharp edges for protection.

There are four cargo tie-down rings in the

cargo compartment.

: Cargo tie-down rings

Bag hook

! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to

secure a load.

There is one bag hook on either side of the

cargo compartment.

: Bag hook

Cargo compartment cover


! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo

compartment higher than the lower edge of

the side windows. Do not place heavy

Stowage areas 237

Stowageandfeatures

Z

objects on top of the cargo compartment

cover.

! When removing and installing the cargocompartment cover, ensure that its end

caps do not scrape the light-colored parts

of the vehicle.

The cargo compartment cover is located

behind the rear bench seat backrest.

Extending and retracting the cargo

compartment cover

X To extend: pull the cargo compartment

cover back by grab handle: and clip it

into retainers; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment

cover from retainers; on the left and right

and guide it forwards by grab handle:

until it is fully retracted.

Installing/removing the cargo

compartment cover

X To remove: make sure that the cargo

compartment cover is rolled up.

X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment

cover: in the direction of the arrow on

the right or left side using grip=.

X Push cargo compartment cover: into

opposite anchorage;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover:

upwards.

X To install: set cargo compartment

cover: on the right or left-hand side in

anchorage;.

X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo

compartment cover: in the direction of

the arrow and insert cargo compartment

cover: into opposite anchorage;.

Cargo net


It is particularly important to use a cargo net

if the vehicle is loaded with small objects

above the level of the backrests. For safety

reasons, always use a cargo net when

transporting loads.

The cargo net is located in the stowage space

under the cargo compartment floor

(Y page 239).

X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the

cargo net.

X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.

The joints on the upper and lower guide rod

should engage audibly.

The corresponding cargo tie down rings for

tightening the cargo net are in the cargo

compartment (Y page 237).


Attaching and tightening the cargo net

X To attach and tighten: insert guide

rod: into bracket;.

X Attach belt hook? to the cargo tie-down

ring and pull down on the loose end of the

lashing strap until the cargo net is taut.

X After driving a short distance, check the

tension of the cargo net and retighten it if

necessary.

X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp

= up to reduce the tension in the lashing

strap.

X Unhook belt hook? from the cargo tie-

down ring.

X Detach guide rod: from bracket;.

X To stow: press the red button on the upper

and lower guide rod.

X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.

X Close the twoVelcro fasteners on the cargo

net holder.

Stowage well under the cargo

compartment floor


! The maximum load capacity of thestowagewell under the cargo compartment

floor is 55 lbs (25 kg).

Opening/closing the trunk floor

A bracket for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc.

is located underneath the cargo

compartment floor.

X To open: open the tailgate.

X Press down handle: on ribbing;.

Handle: folds up.

X Swing the cargo compartment floor

upwards using handle: until it rests

against the cargo compartment cover.

X Fold out hook= on the underside of the

cargo compartment floor.

Stowage areas 239

Stowageandfeatures

Z

X Attach hook= to the cargo

compartment's upper seal?.

X To close: detach hook= from seal?.

X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the

underside of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the trunk floor down.

X Press the trunk floor down until it engages.

Setting the height of the trunk floor

The stowage well under the trunk floor can be

increased or decreased in size as necessary.

To do this, you can lock the floor at two

different heights. The upper catch gives a flat

load surface when the rear bench seat is

folded forward.

X To lift: raise trunk floor; using

handle: in the direction of arrow= and

tug it upwards sharply.

X Lower trunk floor; again. To do this, push

the trunk floor away so that it engages in

the guide on the upper level.

Trunk floor; engages in the upper

position.

X To lower: raise trunk floor; slightly using

handle: and tug it briefly towards you.

X Lower trunk floor; again slowly. Whilst

doing so, press the trunk floor into the

lower level.

Trunk floor; engages in the lower

position.

Roof carrier


G WARNING

Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-

Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage

to the vehicle.

Follow the manufacturer's installation

instructions. Otherwise, an improperly

attached roof rack system or its load could

become detached from the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load of

165 lb (75 kg).

Take into consideration that when the roof

rack is loaded, the handling characteristics

are different from those when operating the

vehicle without the roof rack loaded.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been tested

and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

This helps to prevent damage to the

vehicle.

Position the load on the roof rack in such a

way that the vehicle will not sustain

damage even when it is in motion.

Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's

equipment, you can raise the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and

open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier

is installed.

Attaching the roof carrier


X Open covers: carefully in the direction of

the arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the

anchorage points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Features

Cup holders


G WARNING

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on

vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,

only use containers that fit into the cup

holder. Use lids on open containers and do

not fill containers to a height where the

contents, especially hot liquids, could spill

during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an

accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants

may cause serious personal injury. Liquids

spilled on vehicle equipment may cause

damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.

An open cup holder may cause injury to you

or others when contacted during braking,

vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup

holder may come loose during braking,

vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be

thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects

thrown around in the vehicle interior may

cause an accident and/or serious personal

injury.

G WARNING

Do not transport any heavy, sharp-edged or

fragile bottles in the stowage compartments.

In the event of an accident, the stowage

compartments cannot secure the bottles

adequately. You and/or other vehicle

occupants could be injured.

The stowage compartments in the doors

provide space for bottles:

Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l).

Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l).

The bottles are not secured or prevented from

tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open

drink containers in the stowage

compartments.

Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console

The cup holder and the rubber mat

underneath can be removed for cleaning.

Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

X To remove: carefully pull in the upper

sections of cup holders: on the driver's

and front-passenger sides until they

release.

X Lift the cup holder upwards; until it can

be removed.

X To install: insert the cup holder into lateral

curved sections; in the stowage

compartment. Insert the cup holder so that

Features 241

Stowageandfeatures

Z

the wedge of the upper section of cup

holder: faces forwards.

X Press the cup holder downwards until it

engages on the right and left-hand sides.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is folded

down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup

holder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: press the front of cup holder:

or;.

Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To close: slide the cup holder back until it

engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors

closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

: Mirror light

; Bracket

= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket

? Vanity mirror

A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor

is clipped into retainer; and mirror cover

A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.

X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.

X Swing the sun visor to the side.

X Vehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun

visor horizontally as desired.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit

cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that

the ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,

the stowage space could be damaged.

242 FeaturesStowageandfeatures

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartment

X To open: push the lower section of

cover:.

The cover opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert=

up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=

into the holder until it engages.

i If you remove the ashtray insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for

stowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover= out by its top edge.

X To remove the insert: pull insert; by

recess: in the direction of arrow? until

it disengages audibly.

X Lift insert; up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert: from

above into the holder and press down into

the holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNING


SmartKey from the starter switch. Always

take the SmartKey with you and lock the

vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in

the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child


unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised



could







starter switch or removed from the vehicle,

such as seat adjustment or steering wheel

adjustment





direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s


hot, and the child could be burned by these

parts.

G WARNING

Never touch the heating element or sides of

the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the

knob only.

Make sure any children traveling with you do

not injure themselves or start a fire with the

hot cigarette lighter.

Features 243

Stowageandfeatures

Z

Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartment


ignition lock (Y page 127).


cover:.

The ashtray opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.

Cigarette lighter; will pop out

automatically when the heating element is

red-hot.

12 V sockets




The sockets can be used for accessories with

a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).

Accessories include such items as lamps or

chargers for mobile phones.

If you use the sockets for long periods when

the engine is switched off, the battery may

discharge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. If

the on-board voltage is too low, the power

to the sockets is automatically cut. This

ensures that there is sufficient power to

start the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment center

console

Vehicles with a cover over the stowagecompartment


cover:.

The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

Vehicles without a cover over the stowagecompartment

X Lift up the cover of socket:.


Socket in the rear-compartment center

console

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.


Socket in the cargo compartment


mbrace


! A license agreement must exist in orderto activate the mbrace service. Ensure that

your system is activated and ready for use,

and press theï MB Info call button to

register. If any of the steps mentioned is

not carried out, the system may not be

activated.

If you have questions about the activation,

contact one of the following telephone

assistance services:

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007

RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with the

mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID

and password will be sent to you by post. USA

only: you can use this password to log onto

the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

The mbrace system is available if:

Rit has been activated and is operational

Rthe corresponding mobile phone network

is available for transmitting data to the

Customer Center

Ra service subscription is available

Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle on

a map is only possible if:

RGPS reception is available.

Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to

the Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during an mbrace call,

proceed as follows:

X Press theW orX button on the


or

X Use the volume controller of the audio

system/COMAND.

The mbrace system provides various

services, e.g.:

Rautomatic and manual emergency call

RRoadside Assistance call

RMB Info call

Features 245

Stowageandfeatures

Z

USA only: you can find information and a

description of all available features under

"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

After you have switched on the ignition, the

system carries out a self-diagnosis.

A malfunction in the system has been

detected if one of the following occurs:

RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.

RThe indicator lamp in theF Roadside

Assistance button does not light up during

self-diagnosis of the system.

RThe indicator lamp in theïMB Info call

button does not light up during self-

diagnosis of the system.

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the

following buttons continues to light up red

after the system self-diagnosis:

- the SOS button

- theF Roadside Assistance call

button

- theï MB Info call button

Rthe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace

Service Not Activated message

appears in the multifunction display after

the system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined

above, the system may not operate as

expected. In the event of an emergency,

assistance must be summoned by other

means.

Have the system checked at the nearest

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact

the following service hotlines:

RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance

Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

or 1-888-990-9007


1-888-923-8367

Emergency call


G WARNING

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is

flashing continuously and no voice

connection with the Response center has

been established, then the mbrace system

has not been able to initiate an emergency call

(e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is not

available).

The Call Failedmessage is displayed in the

multifunction display and must be confirmed.

Should this occur, assistance must be

summoned by other means.

! A license agreement must exist in orderto activate the mbrace service. Ensure that

your system is activated and ready for use,

and press theï MB Info call button to

register. If any of the steps mentioned is

not carried out, the system may not be

activated.

If you have questions about the activation,

contact one of the following telephone

assistance services:


Assistance Center under

1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007


1-888-923-8367

An emergency call is dialed automatically if

an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is

triggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated

manually.

As soon as the emergency call has been

initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button

flashes. The Connecting Call message

appears on the multifunction display.

The audio output is muted.


Once the connection has been made, the

Call Connected message appears in the


All important information on the emergency

is transmitted, for example:

RCurrent location of the vehicle (as

determined by the GPS system)

RVehicle identification number

RInformation on the severity of the accident

Shortly after the emergency call has been

initiated, a voice connection is automatically

established between the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle

occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,

the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center attempts to get more information on

the emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediately

sent to the vehicle.

Making an emergency call

G WARNING

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the

vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,

vehicle in a dangerous road location), please

do not wait for voice contact after you have

pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the

vehicle and move to a safe location. The

Response Center will automatically contact

local emergency officials with the vehicle's

approximate location if they receive an

automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice

contact with the vehicle occupants.

X To initiate an emergency call

manually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button;

flashes until the emergency call is

concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center. The indicator

lamp in Roadside Assistance button:

flashes while the call is active. The

Connecting Call message appears on

the multifunction display. The audio output

is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call

Connected message appears in the


If a cellular phone network is available and

there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace

system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center, for example:

Rcurrent location of the vehicle

Rvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call is

active. During the call, you can change to

Features 247

Stowageandfeatures

Z

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI

button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between


Center and the vehicle occupants.

From the vehicle remote malfunction

diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance center can ascertain the nature of

the problem (Y page 251).

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-

Benz technician or organizes for your vehicle

to be transported to the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged

for services such as repair work and/or

towing. Further details are available in your

mbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate a

Roadside Assistance call if:

Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside

Assistance call button: is flashing

continuously.

Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center was

established.

This may be because the corresponding

mobile phone network is not available.

The Call Failed message appears in the


X To end a call: press the~ button on the


or

X Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or on

COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.

This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center. The indicator

lamp inMB Info call button: flashes while

the connection is being made. The

Connecting Call message appears on

themultifunction display. The audio system

is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call

Connected message appears in the


If a cellular phone network is available and

there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace

system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center, for example:

Rcurrent location of the vehicle

Rvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call is

active. During the call, you can change to

the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI

button on COMAND, for example.

Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established between


Center and the vehicle occupants. You can

obtain information on how to operate your

vehicle's systems, on the location of the

nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,

and on further products and services offered

by Mercedes-Benz USA.


USA only: you can find further information on

the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at

http://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate an

MB Info call if:

Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call

button: is flashing continuously.

Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center was

established.

This may be because the corresponding

mobile phone network is not available.

The Call Failed message appears in the


X To end a call: press the~ button on the


or

X Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or on

COMAND.

Call priority

When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside

Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency

call can still be initiated. In this case, an

emergency call will take priority and override

all other active calls.

The indicator lamp of the respective button

flashes until the call is ended. An emergency

call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center.

All other calls can be ended by pressing:

Rthe~ button on the multifunction

steering wheel

Rthe corresponding button on the audio

system or on COMAND for ending a

telephone call

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longer

connected to COMAND. However, if you

want to use your mobile phone, do so only

when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe

location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND


Destination Download gives you access to a

data bank with over 15 million Points of

Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on

the navigation system in your vehicle. If you

know the destination, the address can be

downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the

location of Points of Interest (POIs)/

important destinations in the vicinity.

Furthermore, you can download routes with

up to 20 way points.

You are prompted to confirm route guidance

to the address entered.

The system calculates the route and

subsequently starts the route guidance with

the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobile

phone network is available and data

transfer is possible.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle is

equipped with a navigation system.

Route Assistance

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS

Package and cannot be purchased

separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped with

a navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, you

receive a professional and reliable form of

navigation support without having to leave

your vehicle.

The customer service representative finds a

suitable route depending on your vehicle's

current position and the desired destination.

You will then be guided live through the

current route section.

Features 249

Stowageandfeatures

Z

Search & Send

General notes

i To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and a

navigation system. You must also have an

mbrace service subscription.

"Search & Send" is a destination entry

service. A destination address which is found

on Google Maps® can be transferred via

mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation

system.

Specifying and sending the destination

address

X Go to the website http://

www.maps.google.com and enter a

destination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the

e-mail address of your mbrace

account: click on the corresponding

button.

i Example:

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then

'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address

will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:

In the relevant field, enter the e-mail

address which you specified when

activating your mbrace account.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Sending" can be

found on the website.

Calling up destination addresses


The destination address is loaded into the

vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking

whether navigation should be started.

X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turningcVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route and

subsequently starts the route guidance

with the address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individual

destination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they were

sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz

vehicles with mbrace and active mbrace

accounts:

if multiple vehicles are registered under the

same e-mail address, the destination will

be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening

You can use the vehicle remote opening if you

have unintentionally locked your vehicle and

a replacement SmartKey is not available. The

vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately opened

remotely within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote opening

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened

remotely.

X Contact the following service hotlines:


Assistance Center at


1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007


1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed

upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be

opened via:

Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

section

Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification

number and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone network

is accessible.

Vehicle remote closing

The remote closing feature can be used when

you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you

are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be

locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely

locked within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote closing

may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed

remotely.

X Contact the following service hotlines:



1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007


1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and

you switch on the ignition, the Doors

Locked Remotely message appears in the


USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be

locked via:

Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

section

Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification

number and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phone

network is available and data connection is

possible.

Stolen vehicle recovery service

If your vehicle has been stolen:

X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident

report.

X This number will be forwarded to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center together with your PIN.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center then attempts to locate the mbrace

system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center contacts you and the

local law enforcement agency if the vehicle

is located. However, only the law

enforcement agency is informed of the

location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance center is

automatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis

With the vehicle remote malfunction

diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the

Customer Assistance center can provide

improved support for problems with your

vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data

is transferred to the Customer Assistance

center. The customer service representative

can use the received data to decide what kind

of assistance is required. You are then, for

Features 251

Stowageandfeatures

Z

example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-

Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is

called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred during

an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,

this is initiated by the Customer Assistance

center. You will see the Roadside

Assistance Connected message in the

COMAND display. If the vehicle remote

malfunction diagnosis is able to be started,

the Request for vehicle diagnosis

received. Start vehicle diagnosis?

message appears in the display.

X Press Yes to confirm the message.

X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please

switch on ignition. message appears:

turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.

X If the Please follow the

instructions received by phone and

move your vehicle to a safe

position. message appears: follow the

instructions of the customer service

representative.

The message in the display disappears.

If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote

malfunction diagnosis is canceled

completely.

The vehicle operating state check begins.

Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis

activated message appears.

When the check is finished, the Sending

vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice

connection may be interrupted

during data transfer.) message

appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to

the Customer Assistance center.

X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the Customer

Assistance center is terminated.

The Vehicle Diagnosis:

Transferring data... appears.

The vehicle data is sent to the Customer

Assistance center.

Depending on what the customer service

representative agreed with you, the voice

connection is re-established after the transfer

is complete. If necessary, you will be

contacted at a later time by another means,

e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.

Further functions of the vehicle remote

malfunction diagnosis include, for example:

Rtransfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance center. If a service is overdue,

the COMAND display shows a message

about various special offers at your

workshop.

Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil

level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,

etc. If applicable, you will receive

information on special offers in the E-Mail.

USA only: this information can also be

called up under "Owners Online" at http://

www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle

(Y page 24).

Information on roadside assistance

(Y page 21).

Downloading routes

Downloading routes allows you to transfer

and save predefined routes in the navigation

system. To do this, an SD memory card must

be inserted into the COMAND system. If no

SD memory card is inserted, you must insert

the card into the card slot on the COMAND

system before saving.

A route can be prepared and sent either by a

customer service representative or via the

mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can

include up to 20way points. When a route has

been received by the navigation system,

'Route name' has been saved to

memory card. Do you want to start

route guidance? appears on the COMAND

display. The route is saved to the SD memory

card.


X To start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in the

display.

i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.

Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND. Further information

can be found in the "COMAND", "Online

and Internet services" and "Download

destination/route" sections.

Speed alert

You can define the upper speed limit, which

must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this

selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a

message will be sent to the Customer

Assistance center. The Customer Assistance

center then forwards this information to you.

You can select the way in which you receive

this information beforehand. Possible options

include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.

The data which is sent to the Customer

Assistance center contains the following

information:

Rthe location where the speed limit was

exceeded

Rthe time at which the speed limit was

exceeded

Rthe selected speed limit which was

exceeded

Geo fencing

Geo fencing allows you to select areas which

the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will

be informed if the vehicle crosses the

boundaries of the selected areas. You can

select the way in which you receive this

information beforehand. Possible options

include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.

The area can be determined as either a circle

or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.

You can specify up to ten areas

simultaneously. Different settings are

possible for each area.

USA only: these settings can be called up

under "Owners Online" at http://

www.mbusa.com.

Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call

and inform the customer service

representative that you wish to activate geo

fencing.

Currently inactive areas can be activated by

SMS.

Triggering the vehicle alarm

With this function, you can trigger the

vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm

sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.

Depending on the setting, the panic alarm

lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the

alarm switches off.

Garage door opener


G WARNING

Before programming the integrated remote

control to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure people and objects are

out of the way of the device to prevent

potential harm or damage. When

programming a garage door opener, the door

moves up or down. When programming a gate

operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with

any garage door opener that lacks safety stop

and reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes any

garage door opener model manufactured

before April 1, 1982). A garage door that

cannot detect an object - signaling the door

to stop and reverse - does not meet current

U.S. federal safety standards.

When programming a garage door opener,

park vehicle outside the garage.

Features 253

Stowageandfeatures

Z

Do not run the engine while programming the

integrated remote control. Inhalation of

exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All

exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),

and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness

and possible death. All exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can

cause unconsciousness and possible death.

The HomeLink® garage door opener

integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you

to operate up to three different door and gate

systems.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garage

door opener. If you have difficulty

programming the integrated garage door

opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the following

telephone assistance services:



1-800-FOR-MERCedes


1-800-387-0100

RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515

(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or

compatible products is also available

online at http://www.homelink.com.

i USA only:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and



cause undesired operation.




FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

i Canada only:

This device complies with the RSS-210

Rules of Industry Canada. Operation is


1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and







IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programming buttons

G WARNING

Only press the button on the integrated

garage door opener if there are no persons or

objects present within the sweep of the

garage door. Persons could otherwise be

injured as the door moves.

Integrated garage door opener on the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part of

the integrated garage door opener.

X Before programming for the first time, clear

the memory of the integrated garage door

opener (Y page 256).


ignition lock.


X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on


After a short time, indicator lamp: lights

up yellow.

i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon

as button;,= or? is programmed for

the first time. If the selected button has

already been programmed, indicator

lamp: will only light up yellow after ten

seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicator

lamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlA

towards buttons; to? on the rear-view

mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to

20 cm).

i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage door

opener depends on the garage door drive

system. Several attempts might be

necessary. You should test every position

for at least 25 seconds before trying

another position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control

A until indicator lamp: lights up green.

If indicator lamp: lights up green or

flashes, then programming has been

successful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA for

the garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat

the programming procedure for the

corresponding button on the rear-view

mirror. When doing so, vary the distance

between remote controlA and the rear-

view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage door

system is using a rolling code. After

programming, you must synchronize the

garage door opener integrated in the rear-

view mirror with the receiver of the garage

door system.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Your vehicle must be within reach of the

garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure

that neither your vehicle nor any persons/

objects are present within the sweep of the

door or gate.

Observe the safety notes when performing

the rolling code synchronization

(Y page 253).

Observe the safety notes when performing

the rolling code synchronization.


ignition lock.

X Press the programming button of the door

or gate drive (see the door or gate drive

operating instructions, e.g. under

"Programming of additional remote

controls").

i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,

= or? of the integrated garage door

opener until the door closes.

The rolling code synchronization is then

complete.

Notes on programming the remote

control

Canadian radio frequency laws require a

"break" (or interruption) of the transmission

signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.

Therefore, these signals may not last long

enough for the integrated garage door

opener. The signal is not recognized during

programming. Comparable with Canadian

law, some U.S. garage door openers are

designed to "time-out" in the same manner.

Proceed as follows:

Rif you live in Canada

Rif you have difficulties programming the

garage door opener (regardless of where

you live) when using the programming

steps

Features 255

Stowageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on


After a short time, indicator lamp: lights

up yellow.

X Release the button.

Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote

controlA for two seconds, then release it

for two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of

remote controlA until indicator lamp:

lights up green.

If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat the

process.

X Continue with the other programming

steps (see above).

Problems when programming

If you are experiencing problems

programming the integrated garage door

opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of

the following instructions:

RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage

door drive remote controlA. This can

usually be found on the back of the remote

control.

The integrated garage door opener is

compatible with devices that have units

which operate in the frequency range of

280to 433MHz.

RReplace the batteries in garage door

remote controlA. This increases the

likelihood that garage door remote control

A will transmit a strong and precise signal

to the integrated garage door opener in the

rear-view mirror.

RWhen programming, hold remote control

A at varying distances and angles from the

button that you are programming. Try

various angles at a distance between 2and

12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle

but at varying distances.

RIf another remote control for the same

garage door drive is available, repeat the

same programming steps with this remote

control. Before performing these steps,

make sure that new batteries have been

installed in garage door drive remote

controlA.

RNote that some remote controls only

transmit for a limited amount of time (the

indicator lamp on the remote control goes

out). Press buttonB on remote control

A again before transmission ends.

RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signal

reception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated

garage door opener performs the function of

the garage door system remote control.

Please also read the operating instructions

for the garage door system.


ignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you have

programmed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code:

indicator lamp: lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code:

indicator lamp: flashes green.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The

transmission is halted after a maximum of

ten seconds and indicator lamp: lights

up yellow. Press button;,= or? again

if necessary.

Clearing the memory


ignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.

The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until the

indicator lamp turns green.


i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener before

selling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compass

The compass shows which direction the

vehicle is currently traveling in: N, NE, E, SE,

S, SW, W or NW.

To obtain a correct display in rear-view

mirror:, the compass must be calibrated

and the magnetic field zone must be set.

Setting the compass

X Determine your position using the following

zone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone map

X Press a round pin into opening

=(Y page 257) for approximately three

seconds.

The currently selected zone appears in

compass display;(Y page 257).

X To select the zone: press a round pin into

opening=(Y page 257) repeatedly until

the desired zone is selected.

The zone has been selected when compass

display;(Y page 257) shows the heading.

This takes a few seconds.

Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for

you to drive in a circle without impeding the

remaining traffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,

observe the following points:

Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not

in the vicinity of steel constructions or high-

voltage transmission lines.

Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the

climate control, windshield wipers or rear

window defroster.

Rclose all doors and the tailgate.

X Switch the ignition on.

X Press a round pin into opening

=(Y page 257) for approximately six

Features 257

Stowageandfeatures

Z

seconds until the C symbol appears in


X Drive a full circle at approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).

Once the calibration has been successfully

completed, the current direction appears in


Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING

Whenever you are using a floormat,make sure

there is enough clearance and that the

floormat is securely fastened.

The floormat should always be securely

fastened using the fastening equipment.

Before driving off, check that the floormat is

securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A

loose floormat could slip and hinder proper

functioning of the pedals.

Do not place several floormats on top of each

other as this may impair pedal movement.

X Slide the seat backwards.

X To install: place the floormat in the

footwell.

X Press safety catch knobs: onto

retainers;.

X To remove: pull the floormat off

retainers;.

X Remove the floormat.



Engine compartment ........................ 260

Maintenance ...................................... 264

Care .................................................... 265

259

Maintenanceandcare

Useful information










Engine compartment

Hood

Opening the hood

G WARNING

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle

is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be

forced open by passing air flow.

This could cause the hood to come loose and

injure you and/or others.

G WARNING

Do not open the hood when the engine is

overheated. You could be seriously injured.

Observe the coolant temperature gauge to

determine whether the engine may be

overheated. If you see flames or smoke

coming from the engine compartment, move

away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine

has cooled. If necessary, call the fire

department.

G WARNING

There is a risk of injury if the hood is open,

even if the engine is not running.

Some engine components can become very

hot.

To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those

components described in the Operator's

Manual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G WARNING

To avoid injury, stay clear of moving parts

when the hood is open and the engine is

running.

The radiator fan may continue to run for

approximately 30seconds ormay even restart

after the engine has been switched off. For

this reason, you must not reach into the fan

rotation area.

G WARNING

The engine is equipped with a transistorized

ignition system. Because of the high voltage,

it is dangerous to touch any components

(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic

socket) of the ignition system:

Rwith the engine running

Rwhile starting the engine

Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the

engine is turned manually

G WARNING

The windshield wipers and wiper linkage

could be set in motion.

When the hood is open, you or others could

be injured by the wiper linkage.

Make sure that the windshield wipers are

switched off and that the key has been pulled

out of the ignition lock before opening the

hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. You

could otherwise damage the windshield

wipers or the hood.

260 Engine compartmentMaintenanceandcare

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are

switched off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.

The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap between the hood and

the radiator grill and press hood catch

lever; to the left.

X Raise the hood.

X Pull support strut? out of bracketA.

X Lift up support strut? and insert it into

yellow retaining clip=.

Closing the hood

G WARNING

When closing the hood, use extreme caution

not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that

you do not close the hood on anyone.

Make sure the hood is securely engaged

before driving off. Do not continue driving if

the hood can no longer engage after an

accident, for example. The hood could

otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in

motion and injure you and/or others.

X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same

time, remove support strut? from yellow

retaining clip=.

X Swing support strut? down and press it

into bracketA until it engages.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height

of approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.

If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not

properly engaged. Do not press the hood

closed. Open the hood again and close it

with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notes

Depending on the driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil

over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The

oil consumptionmay be higher than this when

the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at

high engine speeds.

Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may

be in a different location.

When checking the oil level:

Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.

Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine is

at normal operating temperature.

Rif the engine is not at normal operating

temperature, e.g. if the engine was only

started briefly: wait about 30 minutes

before carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 261

Maintenanceandcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oil

dipstick

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guide

tube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.

X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.

If the level is between MIN mark= and

MAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark

= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of

engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNING

If engine oil comes into contact with hot

engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn

yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot

engine parts.


When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If

oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful

to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a

service system. You can obtain a list of the

engine oils and oil filters tested and

approved in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service

Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service

center.

Damage to the engine or exhaust system is

caused by the following:

Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have

not been specifically approved for the

service system

Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after

the interval for replacement specified by

the service system has been exceeded

Rusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to the

engine or to the catalytic converter. Have

excess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove

it.

X Add engine oil.

If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark

on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)

of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turn

clockwise.

Ensure that the cap locks into place

securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil

dipstick (Y page 262).

Further information on engine oil

(Y page 326).

262 Engine compartmentMaintenanceandcare

Additional service products

Checking the coolant level

G WARNING

In order to avoid potentially serious burns:

Ruse extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam or

coolant leaking from the cooling system, or

if the coolant temperature display indicates

that the coolant is overheated.

Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the

coolant tank if the coolant temperature is

above 104 ‡ (40 †). Allow the engine to

cool down before removing the cap. The

coolant tank contains hot fluid and is under

pressure.

Rusing a cloth, slowly turn the cap

approximatelyÖ turn to relieve excess

pressure. If you open the cap immediately,

scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown

out under pressure.

Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which

may burn if it comes into contact with hot

engine parts.

! The coolant may only be checked andcorrected when the engine is cool (coolant

temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †).

Checking the coolant when the coolant

temperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may

result in damage to the engine or to the

engine cooling system.

Example

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the

vehicle is on a level surface and the engine

has cooled down.



X Check the coolant temperature display in


The coolant temperature must be below

104 ‡ (40 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position

0 (Y page 127) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-

clockwise to allow excess pressure to

escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise and

remove it.

If the coolant is at the level of marker bar

= in the filler neck when cold, there is

enough coolant in coolant expansion

tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been

tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far

as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see

(Y page 327).

Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system/headlamp cleaning

system

G WARNING

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly

flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/

antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may

ignite and burn. You could be seriously

burned.

Engine compartment 263

Maintenanceandcare

Z

Example

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.

X To close: press cap: onto the filler neck

until it engages.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the

windshield washer system and the headlamp

cleaning system.

Further information on windshield washer

fluid/antifreeze (Y page 328).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messages

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

informs you of the next service due date.

The multifunction display shows a service

message for several seconds, e.g.:

Next Service A Due in .. Days

Service A Due

Service A Exceeded by .. Days

The letter A or B, possibly in connection with

a number or another letter, shows the type of

service. A stands for a minor service and B for

a major service.

You can obtain further information from any


Information on the type of service and service

intervals (see the separate Maintenance

Booklet).

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display

does not take into account any periods of

time during which the battery is

disconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent service

schedule:

X Note down the service due date displayed

in the multifunction display before

disconnecting the battery.

or

X After reconnecting the battery, subtract

the battery disconnection periods from the

service date shown on the display.

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the

engine oil level. Observe the notes on the

engine oil level (Y page 261).

Hiding a service message

X Press% ora.

Displaying service messages


X Using= or;, select the Serv.

menu.

X Press9 or: to select the ASSYST

PLUS submenu and pressa to confirm.

The service due date appears in the


Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service

interval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, this

setting can be corrected at a qualified


Have service work carried out as described

in the Maintenance Booklet. This may

otherwise lead to increased wear and

damage to the major assemblies or the

vehicle.

264 MaintenanceMaintenanceandcare

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset

the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

after the service work has been carried out.

You can obtain further information, e.g.

regarding service work, from an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from

Mercedes-Benz.

Special service requirements

Arduous operating conditions or increased

loads on the vehicle will require some service

work to be performed more often than for a

vehicle in normal use. Such arduous

conditions include regular city driving with

frequent intermediate stops and use in

mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces.

For example, if the vehicle is used under

arduous operating conditions, have air filters,

engine oil and oil filters changed frequently

and check the wheels often. Further

information can be obtained at a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


Driving abroad

An extensiveMercedes-Benz Service network

is also available in other countries. You can

obtain further information from any


Care

General notes

G WARNING

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.

Always follow the instructions on the

particular container. Always open your

vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the

inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not

designed for cleaning your vehicle.

Always lock away cleaning products and keep

them out of reach of children.


Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

cloths in an environmentally responsible

manner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:

Rdry, rough or hard cloths

Rabrasive cleaning agents

Rsolvents

Rcleaning agents containing solvents

Do not scrub.

Do not touch the surfaces or protective

films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice

scraper. You could otherwise scratch or

damage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularly

after having cleaned the wheels with wheel

cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause

increased corrosion of the brake discs and

brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

should drive for a few minutes after

cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and

the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.

The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for

retaining the quality in the long term.

Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended and approved by Mercedes-

Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing

the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For

this reason, you must drive particularly

carefully after washing the vehicle until the

brakes have dried.

Care 265

Maintenanceandcare

Z

G WARNING

The vehicle is brakedwhen the HOLD function

or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,

deactivate theHOLD function andDISTRONIC

PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an

automatic car wash.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use special

cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can

damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in positionNwhen washing

your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The

vehicle could be damaged if the

transmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof

are fully closed.

Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed/the

airflow control is set to position 0).

Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position

0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car

wash from the very start.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before

cleaning it in an automatic car wash.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off

wax from the windshield and the wiper

blades. This will prevent smears and reduce

wiping noises caused by residue on the

windshield.

Washing by hand

In some countries, washing by hand is only

allowed at wash bays that are specially

designed for this purpose. Observe the legal

requirements in all countries concerned.

X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.

X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the

paintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all

traces of road salt deposits carefully and as

soon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNING

Do not use power washers with circular-jet

nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in

particular the tires. You could otherwise

damage the tires and cause an accident.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the

power washer nozzle. Information about

the correct distance is available from the

equipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle around

when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the following:

Rtires

Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.

Relectrical components

Rbattery

Rconnectors

Rlights

Rseals

Rtrim

Rventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components

can lead to leaks or failures.

266 CareMaintenanceandcare

Cleaning the wheels

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damage

wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularly

after having cleaned the wheels with wheel

cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause

increased corrosion of the brake discs and

brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

should drive for a few minutes after

cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and

the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.

The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:

Rstickers

Rfilms

Rmagnetic plates or similar items

to painted surfaces. You could otherwise

damage the paintwork.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover

and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse

off the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently

with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or

lighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to

the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

The following cannot always be completely

repaired:

Rscratches

Rcorrosive deposits

Rareas affected by corrosion

Rdamage caused by inadequate care

In such cases, visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint

surface, use the paint care products


Benz. This is the case approximately every

three to five months, depending on the

climate conditions and the care product used.

If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or

if the paintwork has become dull, then the

paintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,

please use the paint cleaner recommend and

approved by Mercedes Benz.

Do not use these care products in the sun or

on the hood while the hood is hot.

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to

shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matte

effect:

RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable

materials.

RFrequent use of car washes.

RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.

wax. These products are only suitable for

high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles

with matte finish leads to considerable

surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).

Always have paintwork repairs carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a

clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid

damage to the paintwork due to incorrect

treatment.

Care 267

Maintenanceandcare

Z

These notes also apply to light alloy wheels

with a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo

and plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended and

approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING

Switch off the windshield wipers and remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock before

cleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.

The windshield wipers could otherwise move

and injure you.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,

you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing

solvents to clean the inside of the windows.

Do not touch the insides of the windows

with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or

ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging

the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regular

intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals

and pollen may under certain

circumstances prevent water from draining

away. This can lead to corrosion damage

and damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the

windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning

agent that is recommended and approved

by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNING

Switch off the windshield wipers and remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock before

cleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.

The windshield wipers could otherwise move

and injure you.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,

you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the

graphite coating could be damaged. This

could cause wiper noise.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from

the windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a

damp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again

before switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if

the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic light

lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or

cleaning cloths could scratch or damage

the plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior

lighting using a wet sponge and a mild

cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car

shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths could scratch or damage the plastic

lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn

signals in the exterior mirror housing using

a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,


e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or

cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a

distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between

the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.

Information about the correct distance is

available from the equipment

manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems

with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a power

washer.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

camera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitary

cleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care

product tested and approved byMercedes-

Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of road

grit and corrosive environmental factors may

cause flash rust to form on the surface. You

can restore the original shine of the exhaust

pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in

winter and after washing.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:

Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline

Rabrasive cleaning agents

Rcommercially-available household

cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Do

not put pressure on the display surface

when cleaning. This could lead to

irreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that

it is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a

commercially available microfiber cloth

and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry

microfiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING

When cleaning the steering wheel boss and

dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or

Care 269

Maintenanceandcare

Z

cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning

agents containing solvents cause the surface

to become porous, and as a result, plastic

parts may break away and be thrown around

the interior when an air bag is deployed, which

may result in severe injuries.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:

Rstickers

Rfilms

Rscented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with the

plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality

look of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free

cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning

products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

The surface may change color temporarily.

Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or

selector lever

X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have been


Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim

elements

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,

polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk

of damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but are

mostly made of anodized aluminum and

can lose their shine if chrome polish is

used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead

when cleaning the trim pieces.

If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very

dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you

are unsure as to whether the trim pieces

are chrome-plated or not, consult an


X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with

a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber

cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning

products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes

! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather or

Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can

damage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort of

the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers

Leather is a natural product.

It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for

example:

RDifferences in the texture

RSigns of stretching and marking

RSlight nuances of color

These are characteristics of leather and not

material defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaning

instructions:

RClean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe the

covers down with a dry cloth.

RMake sure that the leather does not

become soaked. It may otherwise

become rough and cracked.

ROnly use leather care agents that have

been tested and approved by Mercedes-


Benz. You can obtain these from a


Seat covers of other materials

! Observe the following when cleaning:

RClean artificial leather coverswith a cloth

moistened with a solution containing

1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

RClean cloth covers with a microfiber

cloth moistened with a solution

containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish

washing liquid). Rub carefully and always

wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving

visible lines. Leave the seat to dry

afterwards. Cleaning results depend on

the type of dirt and how long it has been

there.

RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp

cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire

seat sections to avoid leaving visible

lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash, they may


! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts

by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡

(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap

solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or a cleaning agent recommended and

approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile

cleaning agents recommended and


Care 271

Maintenanceandcare

Z


Where will I find...? ........................... 274

Flat tire .............................................. 275

Battery (vehicle) ................................ 279

Jump-starting .................................... 283

Towing and tow-starting .................. 285

Fuses .................................................. 287

273

Breakdownassistance

Useful information










Where will I find...?

First-aid kit


X To open the stowage compartment: turn

rotary knob: clockwise and fold down

cover;.

X Remove first-aid kit=.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace the

contents if necessary, and replace missing

items.

Vehicle tool kit

General notes

Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit

is in the stowage well beneath the cargo

compartment floor.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-

change tool kit is in the stowage well beneath

the cargo compartment floor.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, the vehicles are not equipped

with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for

changing a wheel are specific to the

vehicle. For more information on which

tools are required to perform a wheel

change on your vehicle, consult a qualified


Tools required for changing a wheel may

include, for example:

RJack

RWheel chock

RLug wrench

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

: Tire inflation compressor

; Towing eye

= Tire sealant filler bottle

274 Where will I find...?Breakdownassistance


X Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 239).

i Towing eye; is located under tire

inflation compressor:.

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit


X Lift the cargo compartment floor up

(Y page 239).

X Remove the tire-change tool kit.

The tire-change tool kit contains:

RJack

RLug wrench

ROne pair of gloves

RFolding wheel chock

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Your vehicle may be equipped with:

RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties) (Y page 275)

Ra TIREFIT kit

Information on mounting a wheel

(Y page 312).

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on

vehicles with MOExtended tires.

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible from

traffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.


(Y page 141).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the

straight-ahead position.



lock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.

Make sure that they are not endangered as

they do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the danger

area while a wheel is being changed.

Anyone who is not directly assisting in the

wheel change should, for example, stand

behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to

traffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the

factory. It is therefore recommended that

you additionally equip your vehicle with a

TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not

feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a


MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)

G WARNING

When driving in emergency mode, the driving

characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when

cornering, accelerating quickly and when

braking. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.

Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,

and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,

off-road). This applies in particular to a laden

vehicle.

Stop driving in emergency mode if:

Ryou hear banging noises.

Rthe vehicle starts to shake.

Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.

RESP® is intervening constantly.

Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.

After driving in emergency mode, have the

wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use. The

defective tire must be replaced in every case.

Flat tire 275

Breakdownassistance

Z

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat

characteristics), you can continue to drive

your vehicle even if there is a total loss of

pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in

conjunction with an active tire pressure loss

warning system.

The maximum driving distance is

approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the

vehicle is partially laden and approximately

18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully

laden.

In addition to the vehicle load, the driving

distance possible depends upon:

Rspeed

Rroad condition

Routside temperature

The driving distance possible in run-flat mode

may be reduced by extreme driving

conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased

through a moderate style of driving.

The maximum permissible distance which

can be driven in run-flatmode is counted from

the moment the tire pressure loss warning


You must not exceed a maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

i When changing or replacing one or all ofthe tires, note the label "MOExtended".

Take note also of the size specified for the

vehicle.






A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from


TIREFIT kit

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT is a tire sealant.

TIREFIT can be used to seal small punctures

of up to 0.16 inches (4 mm), particularly on

the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside

temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNING

In the following situations, the tire sealant is

unable to provide sufficient breakdown

assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire

properly:

Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger

than those mentioned above.

Rthe wheel rim is damaged.

Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures

or on a flat tire.


Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified


G WARNING

The tire sealant is harmful and causes

irritation. It must not come into contact with

your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.

Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant

away from children. There is a risk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant,


RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin

immediately with water.

RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with

your eyes, immediately rinse them

thoroughly with clean water.

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink

plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,

and seek medical attention immediately.


has come into contact with tire sealant.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical

attention immediately.

276 Flat tireBreakdownassistance

TIREFIT sticker, 2-part

X Do not remove any foreign objects which

have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or

nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the

accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire

inflation compressor from the stowage well

underneath the cargo compartment floor

(Y page 274).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker within

the driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near the

valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hoseB and plug= from the

bottom section of the tire inflation

compressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into

the mounting on yellow capA of tire

sealant bottle: until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow

capA of tire sealant bottle: into the

mounting of tire inflation compressor;

until the cap and both hooks engage.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faulty

tire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valve.

X Insert plug= into the socket of the

cigarette lighter (Y page 243) or into a 12 V

power socket in your vehicle (Y page 244).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1

(Y page 127) in the ignition lock.

X Press on/off switch? on the tire inflation

compressor to ON.

The tire inflation compressor is switched

on. The tire is inflated.

i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to

approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation

compressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a

maximum of ten minutes. The tire should

then have attained a pressure of at least

200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than ten minutes at

a time without a break. It may otherwise

overheat.

The tire inflation compressor can be

operated again once it has cooled down.

If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has

been attained after a maximum of ten

minutes, see (Y page 278).


not been attained after a maximum of ten

minutes, see (Y page 278).

Flat tire 277

Breakdownassistance

Z

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,

have them cleaned with perchloroethylene

at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached


not been achieved after ten minutes:

X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse

approximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire

pressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi).

G WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after the specified time, the tire is too badly

damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the

tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire

pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving

characteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified


Tire pressure reached

G WARNING

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant

impairs the driving characteristics and is not

suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of

accident.

You should therefore adapt your driving style

accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed

the specified maximum speed with a tire that

has been repaired using tire sealant.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.

Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic

bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.


Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of

professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist

workshop.


been attained after a maximum of ten

minutes:

X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.

X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire

inflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.

Themaximumspeed for a tire treatedwith tire

sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part

of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the

instrument cluster in the driver's field of

vision.

X Stop after driving for approximately ten

minutes and check the tire pressure with

the tire inflation compressor.

The tire pressure must now be at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNING

If the required tire pressure is not reached

after driving for a short period, the tire is too

badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a

tire pressure that is too low can significantly

impair the vehicle's braking and driving

characteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified


X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least

130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,

see the Tire and Loading Information

placard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire

pressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on

the tire inflation compressor.

278 Flat tireBreakdownassistance

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress

pressure release button: next to

pressure gage;.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the

tire inflation compressor, press together

the locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire


The filler hose remains attached to the tire

sealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire


X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist

workshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler

hose replaced as soon as possible at a


X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every

four years at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Battery (vehicle)


Special tools and expert knowledge are

required when working on the battery, e.g.

removal and installing. You should therefore

have all work involving the battery carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery

can, for example, lead to a short circuit and

damage your vehicle's electronic system. This

can disrupt driving safety systems such as

ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program).

RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock

during braking. This limits the steerability

of the vehicle when braking and the braking

distance may increase. There is a risk of

accident.

RIf ESP®malfunctions, the vehicle will not be

stabilised if it starts to skid or awheel starts

to spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involving

the battery carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop.

G WARNING

Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation

of sparks, which could ignite the highly

explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of

an explosion.

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle

body to remove any existing electrostatic

build-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhen

charging the battery as well as when jump-

starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor the

battery is electrostatically charged. There is

a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.:

Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic

fibers

Rdue to friction between clothing and seats

Battery (vehicle) 279

Breakdownassistance

Z

Rif you push or pull the battery across the

carpet or other synthetic materials

Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth.

G WARNING

During the charging process, a battery

produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit

occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen

gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come into

contact with vehicle parts.

RNever place metal objects or tools on a

battery.

RIt is important that you observe the

described order of the battery terminals

when connecting and disconnecting a

battery.

RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity are

connected.

RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting and

disconnecting the jumper cables.

RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING

Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean

over the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with

water and seek medical attention.


Batteries contain dangerous

substances. It is against the

law to dispose of them with

the household rubbish. They

must be collected separately

and recycled to protect the

environment.

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally friendly

manner. Take discharged

batteries to a qualified

specialist workshop or a

special collection point for

used batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.

Observe the service intervals in the

Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified

specialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialist

workshop. In the exceptional case that it is

necessary for you to disconnect the battery

yourself, make sure that:

Ryou switch off the engine and remove the

SmartKey. Check that all the indicator

lamps in the instrument cluster are off.

Otherwise, electronic components, such

as the alternator, may be damaged.

Ryou first remove the negative terminal

clamp and then the positive terminal

clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.

Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic

system may be damaged.

Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,

the transmission is locked in position P

after disconnecting the battery. The

vehicle is secured against rolling away.

You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positive

terminal clamp must be installed securely

during operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take

protective measures when handling

batteries.

WARNING

Fire, open flames and smoking are

prohibited when handling the

battery. Avoid creating sparks.

280 Battery (vehicle)Breakdownassistance

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid

contact with the skin, eyes or

clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing,

in particular gloves, an apron and

a face mask.

Immediately rinse acid splashes

off with clean water. Consult a

doctor if necessary.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use batteries

which have been tested and approved for

your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These

batteries provide increased impact

protection to prevent vehicle occupants from

suffering acid burns should the battery be

damaged in the event of an accident.

In order for the battery to achieve the

maximum possible service life, it must always

be sufficiently charged.

Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may

discharge over time if you do not use the

vehicle. In this case, have the battery

disconnected at a qualified specialist

workshop. You can also charge the battery

with a charger recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop

for further information.

Have the battery charge level checked more

frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for

short trips or if you leave it standing idle for

a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist

workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle

parked for a long period of time.

Only replace a battery with a battery that has

been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electrical

consumers. The vehicle will then use very

little energy, thus conserving battery

power.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,

e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will

have to:

Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,

see the separate operating instructions).

Rreset the function for folding the exterior

mirrors in/out automatically, by folding

the mirrors out once (Y page 91).

Charging the battery

G WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive

gases can escape from the battery. There is a

risk of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient

ventilation while charging and jump-starting.

Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING


Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean

over the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with

water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING

A discharged battery can freeze at

temperatures below freezing point. When

jump-starting the vehicle or charging the

battery, gases can escape from the battery.

There is a risk of an explosion.

Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before

charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

Battery (vehicle) 281

Breakdownassistance

Z

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the

engine compartment (Y page 283).

X Open the hood (Y page 260).

X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the same

order as when connecting the donor

battery in the jump-starting procedure

(Y page 283).

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/

warning lamps in the instrument cluster do

not light up, it is highly likely that the

discharged battery has frozen. In this case,

you may neither charge the battery nor jump-

start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-

out battery may be shorter. The starting

characteristics can be impaired, particularly

at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out

battery checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

Only charge the installed battery with a

battery charger which has been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery

charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-

Benz vehicles and tested and approved by

Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory.

It permits the charging of the battery in its

installed position. Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for further

information and availability. Read the battery

charger's operating instructions before

charging the battery.

282 Battery (vehicle)Breakdownassistance

Jump-starting

G WARNING


Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over

the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and

seek medical attention.

G WARNING

During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk

of an explosion.

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient

ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks

are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.

RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.

RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.

RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.

RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.

RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING

Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid

repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,

the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper

cables. Observe the following points:

RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.

RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

Jump-starting 283

Breakdownassistance

Z

RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.

RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.

Make sure that:

Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.

Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the

jumper cables are connected to the battery.

Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.


X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).

X Open the hood (Y page 260).

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-

starting device.

X Press together cover: of positive clamp; and slide it back.

X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB

using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.

X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from

positive terminal; and positive terminal=, each time beginning at the contacts on your

own vehicle first.

284 Jump-startingBreakdownassistance

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNING

Functions relevant to safety are restricted or

no longer available if:

Rthe engine is not running.

Rthe brake system or the power steering is

malfunctioning.

Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply

or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more

force may be necessary to steer or brake.


In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,

make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNING

If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-

started is greater than the permissible gross

weight of your vehicle:

Rthe towing eye could detach itself

Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could

rollover.


When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,

its weight should not be greater than the

permissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle

weight rating can be found on the vehicle

identification plate (Y page 323).

G WARNING

The vehicle is braked if the HOLD function is

activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the

vehicle is to be towed.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could

be damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,as this could damage the vehicle. If in

doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,

the vehicles could be damaged.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of

30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than

30 miles (50km), the front axle must be

raised or the entire vehicle raised and

transported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. This

could otherwise damage the transmission.

It is better to have the vehicle transported

than to have it towed.

When towing a vehicle, the transmissionmust

be in position N.

The battery must be connected and charged.

Otherwise, you:

Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in

the ignition lock

Rcannot shift the transmission to position

N.

i Deactivate the automatic locking feature(Y page 191). You could otherwise be

locked out when pushing or towing the

vehicle.

Towing and tow-starting 285

Breakdownassistance

Z

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

X Remove the towing eye from the stowage

space.

The towing eye is beneath the cargo

compartment floor with the vehicle tool kit

(Y page 274).

Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing

eye is beneath the tire inflation

compressor.

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in the


X Take cover: off the opening.

X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the

stop and tighten it.

Removing the towing eye

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.

X Attach cover: to the bumper and press

until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the stowage well

beneath the cargo compartment floor

(Y page 274) in the cargo compartment.

X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the

tire inflation compressor.

Towing the vehicle with the front axle

raised

! The ignition must be switched off if thevehicle is being towed with the front axle

raised. Otherwise, ESP®may intervene and

damage the brake system.


ignition lock.


brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to

position P.


X Release the electric parking brake.

X Deactivate automatic locking

(Y page 191).

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 99).


ignition lock and leave the SmartKey in the

ignition lock.

When towing your vehicle with the front axle

raised, it is important that you observe the

safety instructions (Y page 285).

Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground

G WARNING

The power assistance for the steering and the

brake force booster do not work when the

engine is not running. You will then need

much more effort to brake and steer the

vehicle. Adapt your style of driving

accordingly.

i In order to signal a change of directionwhen towingwith the hazardwarning lamps

switched on, use the combination switch as

usual. In this case, only the turn signals for

the desired direction flash. When you reset

the combination switch, the hazard

warning lamps start flashing again.

286 Towing and tow-startingBreakdownassistance

The automatic transmission automatically

shifts to positionPwhen you open the driver's

or front-passenger door or when you remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order

to ensure that the automatic transmission

stays in position N when towing the vehicle,

you must observe the following points:

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.


ignition lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.

X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the

ignition lock.


X Release the electric parking brake.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 99).

It is important that you observe the safety

instructions when towing away your vehicle

(Y page 285).

Transporting the vehicle

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle

such as axle or steering components.

Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.


ignition lock.

X Shift the transmission to position N.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the electric parking brake.



ignition lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle

onto a trailer or transporter for transporting

purposes.

Tow-starting (emergency starting)

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You could

otherwise damage the automatic

transmission.

When tow-starting, it is important that you

observe the safety instructions (Y page 285).

Fuses


G WARNING

Only use fuses that have been approved for

Mercedes-Benz vehicles and that have the

correct fuse rating for the systems

concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge

faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been

approved or attempting to repair or bridge

faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be

overloaded and result in a fire. Have the cause

traced and rectified at a qualified specialist

workshop.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which

have the correct fuse rating for the system

concerned. Only use fuses marked with an

"S". Otherwise, components or systems

could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down

faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the

components on the circuit and their functions

stop operating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of

the same rating, which you can recognize by

the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed

in the fuse allocation chart.

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the

cause traced and rectified at a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


Fuses 287

Breakdownassistance

Z

Before changing a fuse


(Y page 141).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.


ignition lock and remove it (Y page 127).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

must be off.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

RFuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed

in the direction of travel

RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in

the front-passenger footwell (Y page 288).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair

the operation of the fuses.

X Open the hood.

X Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth.

X To open: open clamps;.

X Fold up cover: in the direction of the

arrow and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is seated

correctly in cover:.

X Insert cover: at the back into openings

= on the fuse box.

X Fold down cover:.

X Hook clamps; into the fuse box and

close.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the front-passenger

footwell

X To open: remove the floormat from the

front-passenger side.

X Fold out perforated floor covering: in the


288 FusesBreakdownassistance

X To release cover=, press retaining

clamp;.

X Fold out cover= in the direction of the

arrow to the catch.

X Remove cover= forwards.

i Fuse allocation chart? is located on the

lower right-hand side of cover=.

X To close: insert cover= on the left-hand

side of the fuse box into the retainer.

Cover= engages in the retainers.

X Fold down cover= until clamps; lock

audibly.

X Fold back perforated floor covering:.

Fuses 289

Breakdownassistance

Z



Operation ........................................... 292

Winter operation ............................... 294

Tire pressure ..................................... 295

Loading the vehicle .......................... 300

Maximum load rating ....................... 303


Standards .......................................... 304

Tire labeling ....................................... 305

Definition of terms for tires and

loading ............................................... 309

Changing a wheel ............................. 312

Wheel and tire combinations ........... 316

Emergency spare wheel ................... 318

291

Wheelsandtires

Useful information











G WARNING

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,

the wheel brakes or suspension components

may be damaged. There is a risk of accident.

Always replace wheels and tires with those

that fulfill the specifications of the original

part (designation, manufacturer, model).

G WARNING

A flat tire severely impairs the driving,

steering and braking characteristics of the

vehicle. There is a risk of accident.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

Rdo not drive with a flat tire.

Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or

consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and

warning notices onMOExtended tires (tires

with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your

vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being

used correctly can impair the operating

safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist

workshop and inquire about:

Rsuitability

Rlegal stipulations

Rfactory recommendations

For information on dimensions and types of

wheels and tires for your vehicle, see

(Y page 316).

Information on air pressure for the tires on

your vehicle can be found:

Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar

Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flap

Runder "tire pressure"

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialist

workshop.

Operation

Information on driving

RIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire

pressures and correct them if necessary.

RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,

noises and unusual handling

characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.

This may indicate that the wheels or tires

are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is

defective, reduce your speed immediately.

Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to

check the wheels and tires for damage.

Hidden tire damage could also be causing

the unusual handling characteristics. If you

find no signs of damage, have the wheels

and tires checked at a qualified specialist

workshop.

RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that

the tires do not get deformed by the curb

or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive

over curbs, speed humps or similar

elevations, try to do so slowly and at an

obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,

292 OperationWheelsandtires

particularly the sidewalls, may be

damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING

Damaged tires can cause tire inflation

pressure loss. As a result, you could lose

control of your vehicle. There is a risk of

accident.

Check the tires regularly for signs of damage

and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of your

vehicle for damage at least once a month, as

well as after driving off-road or on rough

roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of

tire pressure. Pay particular attention to

damage such as:

Rcuts in the tires

Rpunctures

Rtears in the tires

Rbulges on tires

Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and the

condition of the tread across the whole width

of the tire (Y page 293). If necessary, turn

the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect

the inner side of the tire surface.

All wheels must have a valve cap to protect

the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not

mount anything onto the valve other than the

standard valve cap or other valve caps

approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

Do not use any other valve caps or systems,

e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tires

particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire

pressure as necessary (Y page 295).

The service life of tires depends, among other

things, on the following factors:

RDriving style

RTire pressure

RDistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNING

Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.

The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.

This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the driving

conditions. There is a risk of accident.

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires

may exhibit different levels of wear at

different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you

should regularly check the tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the entire

width of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:

RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)

RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before

the legally prescribed limit for the minimum

tire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integrated

into the tire tread.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by

law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire

tread. They are visible once the tread depth

is approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is the

case, the tire is so worn that it must be

replaced.

Operation 293

Wheelsandtires

Z

Selecting, mounting and replacing

tires

ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.

ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.

RAfter mounting new tires, break them in at

moderate speeds for the first 60 miles

(100 km), as they only reach their full

performance after this distance.

RDo not drive with tires which have too little

tread depth. as this significantly reduces

the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)

With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat

characteristics), you can continue to drive

your vehicle even if there is a total loss of

pressure in one or more tires.

MOExtended tires may only be used in

conjunction with an active tire pressure loss

warning system and only on wheels

specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with

a flat tire (Y page 275).






A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a


Winter operation

General notes

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"


Driving with summer tires

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summer

tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and

braking power. Change the tires on your

vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at

very cold temperatures could cause cracks to

form, thereby damaging the tires

permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept

responsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNING

M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than

ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter

and do not provide sufficient traction. There


M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã

in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use

winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of

tire are identified by the M+S marking.

Only winter tires bearing thei snowflake

symbol in addition to the M+S marking

provide the best possible grip in wintry road

conditions. Only these tires will allow driving

safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to

function optimally in winter. These tires have

been developed specifically for driving in

snow.

UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on

all wheels to maintain safe handling

characteristics.

Always observe the maximum permissible

speed specified for the M+S tires you have

mounted.

Once the winter tires are mounted:

X Check the tire pressures (Y page 298).

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Y page 298).

294 Winter operationWheelsandtires

For more information on driving with the

emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 318).

Snow chains

G WARNING

If snow chains are mounted on the rear

wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion

to the vehicle body or to chassis components.

This could cause damage to the vehicle or the

tires. There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

Rnever mount snow chains on the rear

wheels

Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the

front wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage to

the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and

tire combinations" section under "Tires and

wheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use snow chains

that have been specially approved for your

vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a

corresponding standard of quality.

If you intend to mount snow chains, please

bear the following points in mind:

RSnow chains may not be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations. Permissible

wheel-tire combinations (Y page 316).

ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow.

Remove the snow chains as soon as

possible when you come to a road that is

not snow-covered.

RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the appropriate

regulations if you wish to mount snow

chains.

RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

RIf snow chains are mounted, you cannot

use Active Parking Assist (Y page 164).

i You can deactivate ESP®(Y page 63)when pulling away with snow chains

installed. This way you can allow thewheels

to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an

increased driving force (cutting action).

For more information on driving with the

emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 318).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNING

Tires with tire pressures that are too low or

too high are associated with the following

hazards:

Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is

heavily laden or when driven at high

speeds.

Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which can severely impair tire

traction.

Rthe driving, steering and braking

characteristics may be severely impaired.

There is a risk of accident.

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

and check the pressure of all the tires

including the spare wheel:

Rmonthly, at least

Rif the load changes

Rbefore beginning a long journey

Runder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The recommended tire pressures for the tires

mounted at the factory can be found on the

labels described here.

Option 1) Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of

the vehicle (Y page 300).

The Tire and Loading Information placard

contains the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires. The recommended tire pressures

Tire pressure 295

Wheelsandtires

Z

are valid for the maximum permissible load

and up to the maximum permissible vehicle

speed.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside

of the fuel filler flap.

The tire pressure table contains the

recommended pressures for cold tires for

various operating conditions, i.e. differing

load and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustration

purposes only. Tire pressure specifications

are vehicle-specific and may deviate from

the data shown here. Tire pressure

specifications applicable to your vehicle

are located in your vehicle's tire pressure

table.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire

pressure information following is only valid

for that tire size. The load conditions "partially

laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the

table for different numbers of occupants and

amounts of luggage. The actual number of

seats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim

diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.

R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size

and can be found on the tire sidewall

(Y page 306).

If the tire pressures have been set to the

lower values for lighter loads and/or lower

road speeds, the pressures should be reset

to the higher values:

Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/or

Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in the

tire pressure table, may have a negative

effect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this

can lead to an excessive build up of heat and

a sudden loss of pressure.

296 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

For more information, contact a qualified


Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING

If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the

wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire

pressure that is too low may result in a tire

blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.

RCheck the tire for foreign objects.

RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire

valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure

loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire

pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.

This can also result in tire pressure loss. There


Only screw the standard valve cap or other

valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for

your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire

does not permit any reliable conclusion about

the tire pressure.

The tire temperature and pressure increase

when the vehicle is in motion. This is

dependent on the driving speed and the load.

Therefore, you should only correct tire

pressures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least three

hours and

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on

the outside temperature, the vehicle speed

and the tire load. If the tire temperature

changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure

changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi). Take this into account when

checking the pressure of warm tires. Only

correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the

current operating conditions. If you check the

tire pressure when the tires are warm, the

resulting value will be higher than if the tires

were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the

tire pressure to the value specified for cold

tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be

too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires:

Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNING

Tires with pressure that is too low can

overheat and burst as a consequence. In

addition, they also suffer from excessive and/

or irregular wear, which can severely impair

the braking properties and the driving

characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:

Rwear quickly and unevenly

Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Roverheat, leading to tire defects

Rhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristics

Tire pressure 297

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overinflation

G WARNING

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst

because they are damaged more easily by

road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they

also suffer from irregular wear, which can

severely impair the braking properties and the

driving characteristics. There is a risk of an

accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the

tires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:

Rhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristics

Rwear quickly and unevenly

Rbe more susceptible to damage

Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort

Rincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressures

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire

inflation pressure. Always observe the

recommended tire pressure for your vehicle

when adjusting the tire pressure

(Y page 295).

: Example: maximum permissible tire

pressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in

the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures


Observe the "Tire pressure information"


Information on air pressure for the tires on

your vehicle can be found:

Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar

Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flap

Rin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire

pressure, proceed as follows:

X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire and

Loading Information placard on the

B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to

the recommended value (Y page 295).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air

by pressing down the metal pin in the valve

using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,

check the tire pressure again using the tire

pressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system


While the vehicle is in motion, the tire

pressure loss warning system monitors the

set tire pressure using the rotational speed of

the wheels. This enables the system to detect

significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed

of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of

298 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning

message will appear in the multifunction

display.

The tire pressure warning system does not

warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.

Observe the notes on the recommended tire

pressure (Y page 295).

The tire pressure loss warning system does

not replace the need to regularly check your

vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of

pressure on several tires at the same time

cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss

warning system.

The tire pressure loss warning system is not

able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure,

e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign

object. In the event of a sudden loss of

pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking

carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.

The function of the tire pressure loss warning

system is limited or delayed if:

Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's

tires.

Rroad conditions are wintry.

Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style

(cornering at high speeds or driving with

high rates of acceleration).

Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the

vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss

warning system

Restart the tire pressure loss warning system

if you have:

Rchanged the tire pressure

Rchanged the wheels or tires

Rmounted new wheels or tires

X Before restarting, make sure that the tire

pressures are set properly on all four tires

for the respective operating conditions.

The recommended tire pressures can be

found in the table on the fuel filler flap.

The tire pressure loss warning system can

only give reliable warnings if you have set

the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire

pressure is set, these incorrect values will

be monitored.

X Observe the notes on tire pressure

(Y page 295).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 (Y page 127) in the ignition lock.

X Press= or; on the steering wheel

to select the Service menu.


Tire Pressure.


The Run Flat Indicator Active

Press 'OK' to Restart message


If you wish to confirm the restart:


The Tire Pressure Now OK? message



Yes.


The Run Flat Indicator Restarted


display.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressure

loss warning system will monitor the set

tire pressures of all four tires.

or

If you wish to cancel the restart:

X Press the% button.

or

X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message

appears, use the9 or: button to

select Cancel.


The tire pressure values stored at the last

restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 299

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING

Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a

blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the

steering and driving characteristics and lead

to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.

Observe the load rating of the tires. The load

rating must be at least half of the GAWR of

your vehicle. Never overload the tires by

exceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show

the maximum possible load.

(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The

Tire and Loading Information placard

shows themaximum permissible number

of occupants and the maximum

permissible vehicle load. It also contains

details of the tire sizes and

corresponding pressures for tires

installed at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the

B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle

identification plate informs you of the

gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up

of the vehicle weight, all vehicle

occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You

can also find information about the

maximum gross axle weight rating on the

front and rear axle.

The maximum gross axle weight rating is

the maximum weight that can be carried

by one axle (front or rear axle). Never

exceed the maximum load or the

maximum gross axle weight rating for the

front or rear axle.

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight rating

X The Tire and Loading Information placard

gives you details on maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight rating:: "The gross

weight of occupants and luggage must

never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX

pounds."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,

load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if

applicable) must not exceed the specified

value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the

illustration are examples. The maximum

permissible load is vehicle-specific and

may deviate from the data shown here. The

maximum permissible load that applies for

your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's

Tire and Loading Information placard.

300 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

Maximumnumber of seats: determines the

maximum number of occupants allowed to

travel in the vehicle. This information can be

found on the Tire and Loading Information

placard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the

illustration are examples. The number of

seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from

the details shown. The number of seats in

your vehicle can be found on the Tire and

Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions

The following steps have been developed as

required of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575

pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor

Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information

placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount

equals 1400 lbs and there are five

occupants in the vehicle each with a weight

of 150 lbs, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400

Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will

be towing a trailer, load from your trailer

will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this reduces

the available cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle (Y page 303).

Loading the vehicle 301

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with

varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use

a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are

using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information

placard (Y page 301).

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximum

weight of occupants

and cargo (data from

the Tire and Loading

Information placard)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)


Step 2 Number of people in

the vehicle (driver

and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the

occupants

Front: 2

Rear: 3

Front: 1

Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the

occupants

Occupant 1:

150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 2:

180 lbs (82 kg)

Occupant 3:

160 lbs (73 kg)

Occupant 4:

140 lbs (63 kg)

Occupant 5:

120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:

200 lbs (91 kg)

Occupant 2:

190 lbs (86 kg)

Occupant 3:

150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:

150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all

occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

302 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires


Step 3 Permissible load and

trailer load/

noseweight

(maximum

permissible load

rating from the Tire

and Loading

Information placard

minus the gross

weight of all

occupants)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò750 lbs

(340 kg) =

750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò540 lbs

(245 kg) =

960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs

(680 kg)

Ò150 lbs (68 kg)

= 1350 lbs

(612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate

Even if you have calculated the total load

carefully, you should still make sure that the

gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle

weight rating are not exceeded. Details can

be found on the vehicle identification plate on

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle

(Y page 300).

Permissible gross vehicle weight: the

gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,

load and trailer load/noseweight (if

applicable) must not exceed the permissible

gross vehicle weight.

Gross axle weight rating: the maximum

permissible weight that can be carried by one

axle (front or rear axle).

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed

the maximum permissible values (gross

vehicle weight and maximum gross axle

weight rating), have your loaded vehicle

(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full

trailer load if applicable) weighed on a

suitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweight

The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross

weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,

the trailer load/noseweight is included in the

load along with occupants and luggage. The

trailer load/noseweight is usually between

10% and 15% of the grossweight of the trailer

and its load.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum

permissible load can be found on the

vehicle's Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

(Y page 300).

Maximum tire load: is the maximum

permissible weight for which the tire is

approved.


the illustration.

Maximum load rating 303

Wheelsandtires

Z


Standards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading

Standards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are

U.S. government specifications. Their

purpose is to provide drivers with uniform

reliable information on tire performance data.

Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using

three performance factors: tread wear:,

tire traction;, and heat resistance=.

These regulations do not apply to Canada.

Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America

are provided with the corresponding quality

grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.

All passenger car tires must conform to the

statutory safety requirements in addition to

these grades.

Where applicable, the tire grading

information can be found on the tire sidewall

between the tread shoulder and maximum

tire width.


the illustration.

For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on thewear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

U.S. government course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm, due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent

the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as

measured under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces of asphalt

and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

road is always lower than on dry road

surfaces.

You should pay special attention to road

conditions when temperatures are around

the freezing point.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum

tread depth ofã in (4 mm) for all four winter

tires (Y page 294) to maintain normal driving

characteristics in winter. Winter tires can

reduce the braking distance on snow-covered

surfaces in comparison with summer tires.

Stopping distance, however, is still

considerably greater than when the road is

304 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

not covered with ice or snow. Take

appropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

excessive heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C. These represent the tire's

resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause thematerial of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level

of performance which all passenger car tires

must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Tire labeling

Tire labeling overview

The following markings are on the tire in additionto the tire name (sales designation) and themanufacturer's name:

: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard

(Y page 309)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number

(Y page 308)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 303)

? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 298)

A Manufacturer

B Tire material (Y page 309)

C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 306)

D Load index (Y page 308)

E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 305

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating

: Tire width

; Nominal aspect ratio in %

= Tire code

? Rim diameter

A Load bearing index

B Speed rating


General: depending on the manufacturer's

standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall

may not contain any letters or may contain

one letter that precedes the size description.

If there is no letter preceding the size

description (as shown above): these are

passenger vehicle tires according to

European manufacturing standards.

If "P" precedes the size description: these are

passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.

manufacturing standards.

If "LT" precedes the size description: these

are light truck tires according to U.S.

manufacturing standards.

If "T" precedes the size description: these are

compact emergency spare wheels at high tire

pressure, to be used only temporarily in an

emergency.

Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal

tire width in millimeters.

Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the

size ratio between the tire height and the tire

width and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by

the tire height.

Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type.

"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents

diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial

tires.

Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of

over 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in

the size description, depending on the

manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the

diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter

of the rim flange. The rim diameter is

specified in inches (in).

Load bearing index: load bearing indexA

is a numerical code which specifies the

maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the

specified load limit. The maximum

permissible load can be found on the

vehicle's Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side

(Y page 300).

Example:

A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a

maximum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be

carried by the tires. For further information on

the maximum tire load in kilograms and

pounds, see (Y page 303).

For further information on the load-bearing

index, see Load index (Y page 308).

Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies the

approved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNING

Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing

capacity and the approved maximum speed

could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.

There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required for

your vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, always

observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and

306 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of

over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in

the size description, depending on the

manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).

The service specifications consist of load

bearing indexA and speed ratingB.

RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service

specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in

order to find out the maximum speed.

If a service specification is available, the

maximum speed is limited according to the

speed rating in the service specification.

Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this

example, "97 Y" is the service specification.

The letter "Y" represents the speed rating

and the maximum speed of the tire is

limited to 186 mph (300km/h).

RThe size description for all tires with

maximum speeds of over 186mph

(300km/h) must include "ZR", and the

service specification must be given in

brackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).

The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the

maximum speed of the tire is over 186mph

(300km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer

about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S9 up to 100mph (160 km/h)

T M+S9 up to 118mph (190 km/h)

H M+S9 up to 130mph (210 km/h)

V M+S9 up to 149mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.

Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S

identification, thei snow flake symbol

on the tire sidewall. Tires with this marking

fulfill the requirements of the Rubber

Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the

Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)

regarding the tire traction on snow. They

have been especially developed for driving

on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your

vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph

(210km/h).

The speed rating of tires mounted at the

factory may be higher than the maximum

speed that the electronic speed limiter

permits.

Make sure that your tires have the required

speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The

required speed rating for your vehicle can be

found in the "Tires" section (Y page 316).

Further information about reading tire data

can be obtained from any qualified specialist

workshop.

9 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, load

index: may be imprinted after the letters

that identify speed indexB(Y page 306) on

the sidewall of the tire.

RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standard

load (SL) tire

RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tire

RLight Load: represents a light load tire

RC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tire

can carry at a certain pressure


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every

new tire manufacturer or retreader has to

imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire

produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or

retreaders to notify customers of recalls or

other safety-related matters. It makes it

possible for the purchaser to easily identify

the affected tires.

The TIN consists of the manufacturer

identification code;, tire size=, tire type

code? and manufacturing dateA.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tire

symbol: indicates that the tire complies

with the requirements of the Canadian

Transport Ministry.

Manufacturer identification code:

manufacturer identification code; provides

details on the tire manufacturer. New tires

have a code with two symbols. Retreaded

tires have a code with four symbols.

Further information about retreaded tires

(Y page 292).

Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code? can be

used by the manufacturer as a code to

describe specific characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture: date of manufacture

A provides information about the age of a

tire. The first and second positions represent

the week of manufacture, starting with "01"

for the first calendar week. Positions three

and four represent the year of manufacture.

For example, a tire that is marked with

"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in

2008.


308 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Tire characteristics

This information describes the tire cord and

the number of layers in sidewall: and under

tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and

loading

Tire ply composition and material

used

Describes the number of plies or the number

of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire

tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,

nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar

Metric unit for tire pressure.

14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of

1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of

the Canadian Transport Ministry.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants for which the

vehicle is designed multiplied by

68 kilograms (150 lb).


Standards

A uniform standard to grade the quality of

tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction

and temperature characteristics. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.

government testing procedures. The ratings

are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure

The recommended tire pressure applies to

the tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placard

contains the recommended tire pressures for

cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the

maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the

recommended pressures for cold tires for

various operating conditions, i.e. differing

load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to

optional equipment

This is the combined weight of all standard

and optional equipment available for the

vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually

installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire

is mounted.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight

rating. The actual load on an axle must never

exceed the gross axle weight rating. The

gross axle weight rating can be found on the

vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on

the driver's side.

Speed rating

The speed rating is part of the tire

identification. It specifies the speed range for

which the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The gross vehicle weight includes the weight

of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare

wheel, accessories installed, occupants,

luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if

applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR

as specified on the vehicle identification plate

on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross

weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of

the vehicle including all accessories,

occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar

noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle

weight rating is specified on the vehicle

identification plate on the B-pillar on the

driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The maximum weight is the sum of:

Rthe curb weight of the vehicle

Rthe weight of the accessories

Rthe load limit

Rthe weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa

corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire

pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the

equivalent of 1 bar.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load

index may also be imprinted on the sidewall

of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing

capacity more precisely.

Curb weight

The weight of a vehicle with standard

equipment including the maximum capacity

of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-

conditioning system and optional equipment

if these are installed in the vehicle, but does

not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load rating

The maximum load rating in kilograms or

pounds is the maximum weight for which a

tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one

tire.

Maximum load on one tire

Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated

by dividing themaximum axle load of one axle

by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

310 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Aspect ratio

Relationship between tire height and tire

width in percent.

tire pressure

This is pressure inside the tire applying an

outward force to each square inch of the tire's

surface. The tire pressure is specified in

pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal

(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only

be corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tires

The tires are cold:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least three

hours and

Rif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread

The part of the tire that comes into contact

with the road.

Bead

The tire bead ensures that the tire sits

securely on the wheel. There are several steel

wires in the bead to prevent the tire from

coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall

The part of the tire between the tread and the

bead.

Weight of optional extras

The combined weight of those optional extras

that weigh more than the replaced standard

part and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

optional extras, such as high-performance

brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-

performance battery, are not included in the

curb weight and the weight of the

accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

This is a unique identifier which can be used

by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for

example for a product recall, and thus identify

the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the

manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire

type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index

The load bearing index (also load index) is a

code that contains themaximum load bearing

capacity of a tire.

Traction

Traction is the result of friction between the

tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are

distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread

is level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in

(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at

their designated seating positions.

Total load limit

Nominal load and luggage load plus

68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the

number of seats in the vehicle.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 311

Wheelsandtires

Z

Changing a wheel

Flat tire

You can find information on what to do in the

event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section

(Y page 275). You will also find information

on driving with MOExtended tires in the event

of a flat tire.

Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in

the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare

wheel is mounted as described under

"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 312).

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheels may

severely impair the driving characteristics if

the wheels or tires have different dimensions.

The wheel brakes or suspension components

may also be damaged. There is a risk of

accident.

Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheels

and tires are of the same dimensions.

Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes when changing a wheel

(Y page 312).

The wear patterns on the front and rear tires

differ, depending on the operating conditions.

Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

has formed on the tires. Front tires typically

wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires

in the center.

If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you

can rotate the wheels according to the

intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty

book in your vehicle documents. If no

warranty book is available, the tires should be

interchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles

(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear

requires. Do not change the direction of

wheel rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and

the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel

is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,

if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss

warning system.

Direction of rotation

Tires with a specified direction of rotation

have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk

of hydroplaning. You will only gain these

benefits if the correct direction of rotation is

maintained.

An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates

its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels

Storewheels that are not being used in a cool,

dry and preferably dark place. Protect the

tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING

The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt

blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components.

Components damaged in this way may fail

unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not use power washers with circular jet

nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced

immediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery and

level ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually

(Y page 142).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.

X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position

P.

312 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires



lock.

X If included in the vehicle equipment, take

the tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,

it can be found in the tire-change tool kit

(Y page 274).

The folding wheel chock is an additional

securing measure to prevent the vehicle from

rolling away, for example when changing a

wheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.

X Fold out lower plate;.

X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into

the openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level ground

X On level ground: place chocks or other

suitable items under the front and rear of

the wheel that is diagonally opposite the

wheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On slight downhill gradients: place

chocks or other suitable items in front of

the wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly at the

appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the

jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.


Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the

jack must be positioned vertically, directly

under the jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raising

the vehicle:

Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-

specific jack that has been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used

incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the

vehicle raised.

Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheel

is being changed. It is not suited for

performing maintenance work under the

vehicle.

Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and

downhill slopes.

Changing a wheel 313

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake

and inserting wheel chocks. Never

disengage the parking brake while the

vehicle is raised.

Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a

large, load-bearing underlay must be used.

On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay

must be used, e.g. rubber mats.

Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar

objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the

jack will not be able to achieve its load-

bearing capacity due to the restricted

height.

Rmake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground does

not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).

Rnever place your hands and feet under the

raised vehicle.

Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.

Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.

Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate

when the vehicle is raised.

Rmake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one

full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts

completely.

The jacking points are located just behind the

wheel housings of the front wheels and just

in front of the wheel housings of the rear

wheels (arrows).

X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-

changing tool kit and place it on the

hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters

AUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly

beneath the jacking point.

314 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sits

completely on jacking point; and the

base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire is

raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the

ground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub

threads could otherwise be damaged when

you screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING

Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged

wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

bolts to come loose. As a result, you could

lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of

accident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event

of damage to the threads, contact a qualified

specialist workshop immediately. Have the

damaged wheel bolts or hub threads

replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip

over. There is a risk of injury.

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts

when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"


Only use wheel bolts that have been designed

for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety

reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that

you only use wheel bolts which have been

approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and the

respective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hub

while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact

surfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and

push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are

finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts

and bolts are not tightened to the specified

tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.

Have the tightening torque immediately

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

after a wheel is changed.

Changing a wheel 315

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon

nut of the jack so that the letters AB are

visible.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is

once again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a

crosswise pattern in the sequence

indicated (: toA). The tightening torque

must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.

X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle

tools in the vehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly

installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

Observe the recommended tire pressure

(Y page 295).

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires and

wheels which have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz specifically for your

vehicle.

These tires have been specially adapted for

use with the control systems, such as ABS

or ESP®, and are marked as follows:

RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

RMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)

RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only

certain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires

may only be used on wheels that have been

specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use tires, wheels or accessories

tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,

vehicle noise emissions or fuel

consumption, may otherwise be adversely

affected. In addition, when driving with a

load, tire dimension variations could cause

the tires to come into contact with the

bodywork and axle components. This could

result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for

damage resulting from the use of tires,

wheels or accessories other than those

tested and approved.

Information on tires, wheels and approved

combinations can be obtained from any


! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, since

previous damage cannot always be

detected on retreaded tires. As a result,

Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle

safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do

not mount used tires if you have no

information about their previous usage.

Overview of abbreviations used in the

following tire tables:

RBA: both axles

RFA: front axle

RRA: rear axle

The recommended pressures for various

operating conditions can be found:

Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

with the recommended tire pressures on

the B-pillar on the driver's side

Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tire

pressures under various operating conditions

(Y page 295).

Check tire pressures regularly, and only when

the tires are cold. Comply with the

maintenance recommendations of the tire

manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.

316 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always

equip the vehicle with:

Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/

right)

Rthe same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended

tires)

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires are

not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.

It is therefore recommended that you

additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT

kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-

flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit

may be obtained from a qualified specialist

workshop.

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims and

tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with

winter tires. Winter tires are not available

at the factory as standard equipment or

optional extras.

If you would like to equip your vehicle with

approved winter tires, you may also, in

certain circumstances, require rims of the

appropriate size. The sizes of the approved

winter tires may deviate from that of the

standard tires. This is dependent on the

model and the equipment installed at the

factory.

The tires and wheel rims, as well as further

information, can be obtained at a qualified


In the following table, the wheel/tire

combinations are assigned to the vehicle

models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 B 25010

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

10 BlueEFFICIENCY

Wheel and tire combinations 317

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/40 R18 92 W XL MOExtended11, 12 7.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

#

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 225/45 R17 91 H

M+SMOExtended11, 127.5 J x 17 H2

Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)

#

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si 6.5 J x 17 H2


#

BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL

M+SiMOExtended126.5 J x 17 H2


#

Emergency spare wheel


G WARNING

The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type

of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel

and the wheel to be replaced may differ.

Mounting an emergency spare wheel may

severely impair the driving characteristics.


To avoid hazardous situations:

Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.

Rnever install more than one spare wheel or

emergency spare wheel that differs in size.

Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size briefly.

Rdo not switch ESP® off.

Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size replaced at the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions

as well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size, you must not

exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.

Snow chains must not be mounted on

emergency spare wheels.

General notes

You should regularly check the pressure of

the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior

to long trips, and correct the pressure as

necessary (Y page 295). The value on the

wheel or as given in the "Technical data"

section (Y page 316) is valid.

i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressure

loss warning system cannot function

reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss

11 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

12MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with activated tire pressure loss

warning.

318 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

warning system when the defective wheel

has been replaced with a new wheel.

An emergency spare wheel may also be

mounted against the direction of rotation.

Observe the time restriction on use as well as

the speed limitation specified on the

emergency spare wheel.

Replace the tires after six years at the latest,

regardless of wear. This also applies to the

emergency spare wheel.

Removing theemergency sparewheel


X Loosen lashing straps; on emergency

spare wheel bag:.

X Remove emergency spare wheel bag:

with the "Minispare" emergency spare

wheel.

For further information on changing and

mounting a wheel, see (Y page 312).

Technical data

"Minispare"

emergency spare

wheel

Tires Steel wheel

T 125/80 R17 99 M

Tire pressure: 420 kPa

(4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 17 H2

ET 19.5

Emergency spare wheel 319

Wheelsandtires

Z


Information regarding technical

data .................................................... 322

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 322

Warranty ............................................ 323

Identification plates ......................... 323

Service products and filling capaci-

ties ..................................................... 324

Vehicle data ...................................... 329

321

Technicaldata

Useful information










Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consult

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for

the data for all vehicle variants and trim

levels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNING

Driving safety may be impaired if non-

approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-

relevant accessories are used.

This could lead to malfunctions in safety-

relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends

that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or

parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels

and accessories that have been specifically



Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajor

assemblies and parts which are of the same

quality as new parts. They are covered by the

same Limited Warranty entitlements as new

parts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units and

sensors for these restraint systems,may be

installed in the following areas of your

vehicle:

Rdoors

Rdoor pillars

Rdoor sills

Rseats

Rdashboard

Rinstrument cluster

Rcenter console

Do not install accessories such as audio

systems in these areas. Do not carry out

repairs or welding. You could impair the

operating efficiency of the restraint

systems.

Have aftermarket accessories installed at

a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-

Benz recommends that you use an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this

purpose.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to

strict quality control. Each part has been

specially developed, manufactured or

selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and

fine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-

Benz parts should therefore be used.

More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for

Mercedes-Benz models.

All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply

of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for

necessary service and repair work. In

addition, strategically located parts delivery

centers provide quick and reliable parts

service.

Always specify the vehicle identification

number (VIN) (Y page 323) and the engine

number (Y page 324) when ordering genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts.

322 Genuine Mercedes-Benz partsTechnicaldata

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Information

booklet contains detailed information about

the warranties covering your vehicle.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will

exchange or repair any defective parts

originally installed in the vehicle in

accordance with the terms of the following

warranties:

RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty

REmission Performance Warranty

RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Rhode Island and Vermont Emission

Control System Warranty

RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are

covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and

Accessories warranties. You can obtain

information about this from any authorized


i Should you lose your Service andWarranty Information booklet, have an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange

for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with

vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Vehicle identification plate (example)

; VIN

= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as an

example. This data is different for every

vehicle and can deviate from the data

shown here. You can find the data

applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's

identification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its

rearmost position.

X Fold up floor covering: in front of the

right-hand front seat.

You will see VIN;.

Identification plates 323

Technicaldata

Z

The VIN can also be found in the following

locations:

Rat the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 324)

Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 323)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate

; Engine number (stamped into the

crankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling

capacities


G WARNING

Comply with all valid regulations with respect

to handling, storing and disposing of service

fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger

persons or the environment.

Keep service fluids out of the reach of

children.

For health reasons, you should prevent

service fluids from coming into direct contact

with your skin or clothing.

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a

physician immediately.


Dispose of service products in an

environmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:

Rfuels

Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

Rcoolant

Rbrake fluid

Rwindshield washer fluid

Rclimate control system refrigerant

Components and service products must be

matched. You should therefore only use

products that have been tested and approved

by Mercedes-Benz.

Information about tested and approved

products can be obtained from an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

You can recognize service products approved

by Mercedes-Benz by the following

inscription on the containers:

RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendations

indicate a level of quality or a specification in

accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.

MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been


Fuel


G WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel

incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and

explosion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before

refueling.

324 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

G WARNING

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.


You must make sure that fuel does not come

into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel

vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,


RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.

RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly with

clean water. Seek medical assistance

without delay.

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not induce

vomiting.


has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total

capacity

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 13.2 US gal

(50.0 l)

Model Of which

reserve

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Approx.

1.6 US gal

(6.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the

ignition if you accidentally refuel with the

wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter

the fuel system. Even small amounts of the

wrong fuel could result in damage to the

fuel system and the engine. The repair

costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist

workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel

lines drained completely.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoids

damaging the catalytic converter.

If engine running problems are apparent,

have the cause checked immediately and

repaired. Excess unburned fuel can

otherwise enter the catalytic converter,

leading to overheating and possibly

causing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-

grade unleaded gasoline may be used.

If there is no premium-grade unleaded

gasoline available and regular unleaded

gasoline must be used, please observe the

following precautions:

Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with

regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest

with premium-grade unleaded gasoline

as soon as possible.

Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.

Ravoid sudden acceleration.

Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do not

allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.

Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being

operated in mountainous terrain, do not

depress the accelerator pedal further

thanÔ of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded

gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.

Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or

unleaded gasolinewith additives can be used.

The concentration of additives in the fuel,

however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:

REthanol

RTAME

RETBE

RIPA

RTBA

Service products and filling capacities 325

Technicaldata

Z

For MTBE, the concentration should not

exceed 15%.

The concentration of methanol in gasoline,

including other additives, must not exceed

3%.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is not

permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol

and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.

All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel

requirements, e.g.:

Rknock resistance

Rboiling point

Rvapor pressure

Youwill usually find information about the fuel

grade on the pump. If you cannot find the

label on the pump, ask the staff for

assistance.

i Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.

Information on refueling (Y page 139).

Additives

! Operating the engine with fuel additivescan increase wear and tear to the fuel

system high-pressure pump and lead to

contamination of the entire fuel system.

The repair costs are high. This does not

include additives for the removal and

prevention of residue buildup. gasoline

must only be mixed with additives

recommended by Mercedes-Benz. More

information about recommended additives

can be obtained from any authorized


One of the main problems of poor fuel quality

is the forming of deposits that are created

during the gasoline combustion process.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use

branded fuels that have additives.

If you use fuels without these additives over

a longer period of time, carbon deposits may

build up. These deposits form at the inlet

valves and in the combustion chamber in

particular.

This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:

Rlonger engine warm-up phase

Runeven idle

Rengine noise

Rmisfiring

Rloss of power

Carbon deposits may form if the availability

of gasoline with relevant additives is

insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,

Mercedes-Benz recommends additives

approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;

see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

For a list of approved products, consult an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply

with the instructions for use on the product

label.

Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This

causes unnecessary costs and could damage

the engine.

Engine oil

Points to note

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to

fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do

not change the engine oil or oil filter in

order to achieve longer replacement

intervals than those prescribed. You could

otherwise cause engine damage or damage

to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Follow the instructions in the service

interval display regarding the oil change.

Otherwise, youmay damage the engine and

the exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The engine oils are matched to the

performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and

service intervals. You should therefore only

use engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with maintenance

systems.

For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,

consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz


Center. Or visit the website


The table shows which engine oils have been


Model Engine

model

MB

Approval

B 250

BlueEFFICIENCY

270 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacities

The following values refer to an oil change

including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics

of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,

this means that it is thick; a low viscosity

means that it is thin.

Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)

classification suitable for the prevailing

outside temperatures. The table shows you

which SAE classifications are to be used. The

low-temperature characteristics of engine

oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a

result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is

therefore strongly recommended that you

carry out regular oil changes using an

approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE

classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNING

Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs

moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling

point.

If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,

vapor pockets may form in the brake system

when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when

driving downhill). This would impair braking

efficiency.

You should have the brake fluid renewed at

regular intervals. The brake fluid change

intervals can be found in the Maintenance

Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can

be obtained at any qualified specialist

workshop or on the Internet at


i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant


G WARNING

Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, open

flames and smoking are prohibited when

handling antifreeze.

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot

engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn

yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot

engine parts.

Service products and filling capacities 327

Technicaldata

Z

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. You

could otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can be

found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications

for Service Products, MB Specifications for

Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the

Internet at

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or

contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperatures

prevail.

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not

sufficiently protected from corrosion and

overheating.

The coolant is a mixture of water and

antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs

the following tasks:

Rcorrosion protection

Rantifreeze protection

Rraising the boiling point

If the coolant has antifreeze protection down

to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the

coolant during operation is approximately

266 ‡ (130 †).

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor

concentration in the engine cooling system

should:

Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down to

approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat

will not be dissipated as effectively.

The coolant is checked with every

maintenance interval at a qualified specialist

workshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensures

adequate antifreeze and corrosion

protection.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

B 250

BlueEFFICIENCY

Approx. 8.2 US qt

(7.8 l)

i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitoraccording to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.

Windshield washer system and

headlamp cleaning system


G WARNING

Windshield washer concentrate is highly

flammable. If it comes into contact with hot

engine components or the exhaust system it

could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Make sure that no windshield washer

concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or

MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid

could damage the plastic lenses of the

headlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, the

level sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. The

spray nozzles may otherwise become

blocked.

At temperatures above freezing:

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.

MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.


At temperatures below freezing:

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.

MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside

temperature.

RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 2 parts water.

RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.

RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer

fluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

B 250

BlueEFFICIENCY

3.2 US qt (3.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notes

Please note that for the specified vehicle

data:

Rthe heights specified may vary as a result

of:

- Tires

- Load

- Condition of the suspension

- Optional equipment

Dimensions and weights

Model :

Maximum

headroom

;

Opening

height

B 250

BlueEFFICIEN

CY

73.8 in

(1874 mm)

78.0 in

(1981 mm)

B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle length 171.6 in

(4359 mm)

Vehicle width

including exterior

mirrors

79.1 in

(2010 mm)

Vehicle height 61.3 in

(1558 mm)

Wheelbase 106.3 in

(2699 mm)

Turning radius 36.1 ft

(11.0 m)

Maximum roof

load

165 lb

(75.0 kg)

Vehicle data 329

Technicaldata

Z

2013_B_Class

Documents

Transcript of 2013_B_Class